JP2015073575A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine hardly providing a player with a feeling of strangeness.SOLUTION: When there is no operation-start storage information, the operation-start condition of which has been established before then, a Pachinko machine 1 executes a special lottery triggered by a new operation-start winning and, when it is won in the special lottery, transfers to a special game state to execute various performance operations. The Pachinko machine 1 has a slightly temporal interspace before and after the transfer of the game state, however, has a contrivance not providing the player with the feeling of strangeness before and after the transfer.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a so-called ball-type gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”).

  In general gaming machines, when a game ball is received at the start port and the start condition is satisfied, there is no special symbol if there is no start memory information (hereinafter also referred to as a holding ball) for which the start condition has already been satisfied. Display of the change, and a stop symbol is displayed when a predetermined change time has passed. In addition, in such a gaming machine, after the start condition is established, a special lottery is subsequently executed, and when the special lottery is won, the normal gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state (see Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2005-192783 A

  When the game state transitions in this way, for example, the game content associated with the stored ball that has been stored before the game state transition may be executed after the game state transition. There was a possibility of giving a sense of incongruity.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to prevent the game content linked to the game state to be transferred from causing a player to feel uncomfortable.

  In order to achieve the above-described object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has variable display means for variably displaying at least one type of special symbol, and whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied. If the winning condition is satisfied, the game control means for shifting from the normal game state to the special game state, the effect control means for controlling the effect operation by the control of the game control means, and the effect control means And a display unit having a display area in which display content corresponding to the control of the game is displayed, and the game control unit represents a transition destination indicating that the game state has been transitioned in response to the transition of the game state. The command is transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is configured to produce the action in a manner that takes into account the transferred gaming state based on the transfer destination command received from the game control means. And controlling the.

  In this way, when the game state is transferred, the effect control storage means can immediately grasp that the game state has been transferred, so that the game content linked to the game state to be transferred is determined by the player. It is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling.

  In other words, the gaming machine according to the present invention uses variable display means for variably displaying at least one kind of special symbol, and the special symbol using the variable display means when the start condition is established after the start condition is established. Depending on the control of the effect control means, the game control means for displaying the change symbol and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol when the predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the effect control means for controlling the effect action by the control of the game control means, Display means for displaying the displayed content, wherein the game control means includes at least one start storage information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied, although the start condition is satisfied. Start memory information storage means for storing up to a predetermined number in a manner capable of specifying the order in which the start conditions are satisfied; and Until the start condition corresponding to the stored information is satisfied, the hold display mode is derived in a mode in which the at least one startup storage information can be specified, and then stored by the startup storage information storage unit. When the start condition corresponding to the startup storage information to be prioritized among the at least one startup storage information is satisfied, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the startup storage information to be prioritized is stopped, and the A suspension digestion control means for erasing the startup storage information to be prioritized from the startup storage information storage means; a lottery means for determining whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied; Stop symbol control means for displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the established winning condition using the variable display means, and the winning condition is not satisfied If the winning condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state corresponding to the established winning condition, or the normal gaming state is changed thereafter. A gaming state control means and a post-transition gaming state notification for transmitting to the effect control means a transition destination command indicating the transition to a predetermined gaming state triggered by the transition of the gaming state by the gaming state control means And the effect control means controls the effect operation in a manner in consideration of the transferred game state based on the transfer destination command received from the game control means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the game content linked to the transitioned gaming state from causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally upper right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally upper left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 17 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a payout control board and a board connected thereto, a power supply board, a terminal board connected thereto, and the like shown in FIG. 16. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a peripheral control board 4140 and a board connected to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 16. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 22. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the interface circuit for communication between the board | substrates of a main control board and a peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. FIG. 29 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 28. It is a circuit diagram which shows a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a touch-panel controller and a touch sensor periphery. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 36 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 35. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 38. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 41. FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a rotation angle switch log | history production process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a spherical collision determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the number-of-use prize ball stock number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pay-out ball engagement operation determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere ball movement setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation | movement monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error cancellation operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal process (a) at the time of paying-out operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation process (a) from CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game preparation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game mode determination process. It is an example of the table used for the jackpot game state determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. It is a flowchart which shows an example of jackpot game processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in which the common image from which a display size mutually differs was represented. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and (A) a notice display indicating that the game is explained until the jackpot game is started, and (B) a game in the game until the jackpot game is started. It is a guidance display that guides the person's gaze. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is an explanatory display about the method of selecting a harassment type jackpot game. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is explanatory display about the method of selecting the pounding type jackpot game. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is a display which prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game is executed. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is a display which shows that the present is a harsh type timing. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is a display which shows that the present is a pounding type timing. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and after a pounding type jackpot game is selected, a guidance display that guides the player's gaze to the back lower right effect unit that reminds the rattle lottery machine is there. (A) The figure which shows the aspect of the display effect performed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device based on the result of special lottery, (B) The display effect performed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device based on the result of special lottery It is a figure which shows the aspect of the display effect following (A). (A) A display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device on the basis of the result of the special lottery, and is a diagram showing an aspect of the display effect following FIG. 80 (B), and (B) based on the result of the special lottery. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing a display effect mode following (A). (A) A display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device on the basis of the result of the special lottery, and a diagram showing a form of the display effect following FIG. 81 (B), and (B) based on the result of the special lottery. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing a form of the display effect following (A). It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device based on the result of the special lottery, and is a diagram showing an aspect of the display effect following FIG. It is a time chart which shows the process from jackpot generation | occurrence | production by special symbol to the jackpot game start. 10 is a flowchart of a gaming state determination process executed according to backup data as one process in the power recovery process (power-on process) by the main control MPU.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the whole pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and a box frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed and the front side is opened. A main body frame 3 (specific frame), a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 (specific frame) that is pivotally supported to be freely opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the player side is provided. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and It has.

  In the front view, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction, and the horizontal width in each horizontal direction is substantially the same. In addition, the vertical width dimension of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is slightly shorter than the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the right end of the door frame 5 are moved to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged vertically. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player holds the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590 so that the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. The game balls and obstacle nails in the area 1100, various winning holes and bonuses cannot be touched.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction, and respective frame plates. And four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of 10, 11, 12, and 13 and connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 with the connecting member 14 to form a vertically long rectangular shape ( (Square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. Note that an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light metal molds (for example, aluminum alloys) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the game hall, the operator The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

  The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower support plate 20 and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12. A support bracket 21, a reinforcement bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be opened and closed. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. A main body frame shaft support formed on a main body frame shaft support bracket 644 of the main body frame 3, which will be described later, is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the main body frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644, the main body frame 3 can be simply mounted by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 in the support hole 20c. It can be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) attached and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 with a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 1) of a locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected to each other. The engagement is released and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640 that are respectively attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end of the main body frame base 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5; A ball hitting device 650 that is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600 and drives a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out a ball, and when the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end portion of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is formed to have a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. Has been. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 through which the inside of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction and can fit and hold the outer periphery of the game board 4, and the main body frame A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 when viewed from the front, and is recessed backward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 to the rear. The protruding door frame protruding piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent protruding piece 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent protruding piece 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms the inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The free end portions (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other by the peripheral wall portion 605 so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall when viewed from the front in the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fastened, and a plurality of upper end restricting ribs 609 arranged in the left-right direction in a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower ends can contact the upper end of the game board 4 And. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out-ball discharge groove of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. Yes. Further, the game board locking portion can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. . Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. The ball striking device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 that extends leftward and downward is formed on the left side of the front view of the ball hitting device 650 from the upper end of the shot rail 660. It is like that. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626. The game ball descending the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) in the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in the front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the opening and the left and right sides in the front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating the through hole. The opening portion of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The 800 main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. Door frame opening switch 618 (specific frame opening switch) is attached, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the door frame 5 is opened. Can be detected. In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a main body frame opening switch 619 (specific frame opening switch) for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear side below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 will be described. The upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 are respectively attached to the bracket mounting portions on the upper left and lower rear ends of the main body frame base 600 using a predetermined screw to attach the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like front extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. Portion 632, a shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the shaft support pin 633 in front view (FIG. 7). And the door frame shaft support hole 634 penetrating in the up-down direction, and the front end of the front extension 632 hangs downward from the front end and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft support 630, the attachment portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is provided. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-like front extension 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension 642b, and the front And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end portion of the extension portion 642b when viewed from the front and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends forward and downward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A front extending portion 644b that protrudes, and a main body frame shaft support hole that penetrates in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion and a front extension portion 644b by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft bracket 640 is in a state where the mounting portion of the door frame shaft bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension part 642b and the front extension part 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment part of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction.

  The upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support 640 are coaxial. The body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protruding piece 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21, so that the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed. It is like that.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640. 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. 5 is mounted on the front extension 642b of the door frame shaft bracket 642, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed on the door frame of the upper shaft bracket 630. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the pivotal support hole 634. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 overlap vertically, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball launching device 650 will be described. The hitting ball launching device 650 is mounted so that the metal plate launch base 652 is mounted at a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600, and the rotary drive shaft 654a projects forward from the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. Firing solenoid 654, a hitting ball 656 fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a predetermined movement path of the tip 658 A firing rail 660 extending diagonally to the upper left when viewed from the front and attached to the front surface of the firing base 652, and a tip 658 at the tip of the hitting ball 656 passes between the firing rail 660 and the top of the firing rail 660. A ball stopper that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time. 662 and a stopper for restricting the ball hitting ball 656 (tip 658) from rotating toward the shooting rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the shooting rail 660 by the ball stopper piece 662 can be hit. 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is not shown in detail, but the rotational drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. . Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape to the axis of the rotation drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a hook portion 656b with the hook tip 658 fixed to the tip at a normal direction, a stopper portion 656c extending to the opposite side of the hook portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween, and a stopper portion 656c capable of contacting the stopper 664 It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  When the hitting ball launcher 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the firing rail 660 is substantially the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located below and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. Thus, a foul space 626 extending downward is formed. The hit ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. It has become. In a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is positioned below the foul space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 are stored, and then paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. The prize ball unit 700 has a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing game balls supplied from the Pachinko island equipment side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction, and the game balls paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit and are paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls. And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and an external terminal board cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal board 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth opened upward, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low.

  The tank rail unit 730 is connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 as viewed from the front, A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the rail 731; a ball stop piece 735 that can move forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the outlet; It is equipped with. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a predetermined width that communicates with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width that is slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage that opens into the left side of the rear view when bent in a substantially square shape and communicates with the lower left side (open side) of the rear side of the distribution space, and the right side of the rear side of the distribution space (Axis support side) A ball passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 is meshed with the first gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 and disposed behind the motor support plate, the second gear meshing with the first gear, and the second gear. The third gear that rotates together with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and the dispensing rotator is fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable on the opposite side of the third gear. A rotation detecting board having a plurality of detection slits (three in the present embodiment) formed at intervals, a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage A counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752 are held. Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotator includes three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. When the payout rotator rotates, 1 game ball supplied from the supply passage is 1 Each ball is accommodated in the recess, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detecting board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are equally formed (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detecting board, and correspond to between the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The award ball device 740 is configured such that when the payout rotating body is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage is paid out to the award ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a hall clerk or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the ball removal passage. It can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the outside outside of the pachinko machine 1 via a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end. The full branching unit 770 opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction at the upper end of the rear end, and the award of the prize ball device 740 is obtained. A prize ball receiving hole for a game ball flowing down the ball passage, a branching space that is arranged below the prize ball receiving hole and extends in the left-right direction, and a game from directly under the prize ball receiving hole in the branching space to the front side A normal path for guiding the ball, a normal ball outlet 774 that releases the game ball flowing through the normal path to the front and opened at the front right end of the front view, and the right side in the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving opening in the branch space A full tank passage that guides the game ball from the raised position to the front side, and a full ball exit 776 that discharges the game ball that has circulated through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left in front of the normal ball outlet 774. ing.

  In addition, the full tank branching unit 770 includes a ball receiving port that receives a game ball that opens upward at the left end portion of the rear end upper portion when viewed from the front and flows down the ball passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball receiving portion. A ball passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has circulated through the ball passage is released forward and at the left end of the front view at a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball exit 776 And an open ball outlet.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively connected to the first ball inlet 542 a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) and communicates with each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540, The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. The ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side upper end of the main body frame base ball passage in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet is the main body frame of the main body frame base 600. It is to be delivered to the base ball passage.

  When a game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (award ball apparatus 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the upper ball ball is raised from the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls that can no longer come out to the side of the tray 301 stagnate in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fill up the normal passage upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving port cannot normally enter the passage, and starts moving in the lateral direction in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved in the horizontal direction is full. So as to enter the tongue passage and be supplied from the full bulb exit to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage, and the second bulb outlet of the foul cover unit 540. It has become.

[3-5. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the substrate unit 800 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the substrate unit base 810, and a substrate. A power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box attached to the rear face of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 when viewed from the front. And board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 downward from the left and right front in front view, A discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward and the front of the discharge passage 842 and the side of the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) is opened forward and upward. A power supply board box holder 840 is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side, and a box housing portion capable of housing the front end of the power board board box 850 is provided.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening of the substrate unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 is circulated through the main body frame base ball passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600 and flows down to the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening of the substrate unit base 810. The game ball and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharge portion of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. ing.

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. A power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened front, and a box base 861. And a payout control board 4110 attached to the rear surface and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In the present embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  Further, the payout control board box 860 is configured such that an operation switch 860a (error release unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a includes a RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and a RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 (hereinafter also referred to as “main control RAM”) when the power is turned on. When the error is notified after the power is turned on, or when the error is notified, the operation is performed to cancel the error. And a function for canceling an error after the input (after a period when the function is performed as the RAM clear). A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear face of the board base 871 and fixed with a peripheral panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear, and a board base. A board for lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball attached to the rear surface of 871 and having CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed to the rear, so that peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. And a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the pachinko machine facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the CR unit relay terminal 873. Is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided in the door frame 5, the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face the front side of the main body frame base 600, Wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the front side of the relay terminal plate cover 692. Only the connection terminal faces the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a clean appearance.

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining rental display unit 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch in the tray unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. It should be noted that the ball rental button 361, the return button 362, the remaining rental display unit 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540 are provided. The description will be described later.

  In addition, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each decorative unit 200, 240, 280 and the decorative unit provided in the plate unit 300 or the operation unit 400 and the operation unit 400 arranged on the door frame 5 side. , For relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414, various switches for detecting the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side It is. The decorative units 200, 240, and 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial operation, and the like. The various switches that detect the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape), A right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side facing the right side decoration unit 200 and attached to the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit disposed below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of 100.

  The door frame 5 is attached to the front side of the door frame base unit 100 at the lower part of the gaming window 101, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the right side of the dish unit 300. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is provided in the vicinity of the upper plate 301 capable of storing a large number of game balls so as to cover the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device). For example, a capacitive touch panel 480 (contact type input means) having an operation surface capable of detecting a contact state, penetrating the tray unit 300 and attached to the lower right corner portion of the door frame base unit 100, and driving a game ball The handle device 500 for operation and the rear of the door frame base unit 100 disposed on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 that is attached to the right side of the foul cover unit 540, a ball feeding unit 580 that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a game window 101 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 may be integrated or separate.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner periphery formed in a substantially elliptical shape. An upper bracket 120 that is attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110 and fixes the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides that are attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. A speaker 130 (sound output unit) and a handle bracket for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower part, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1) attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. 1), and a launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) that is disposed on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. A main control board mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191 and provided in a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and a game board 4 described later. A handle relay terminal plate 192 (see FIG. 1) that relays the connection to the 100, a handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and a center in the left-right direction. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 that is disposed on the opposite side to the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 (on the right side (axial support side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. (See FIG. 1) and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) covering the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers (sound output sections) of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. And an amplification circuit that amplifies an acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. In addition, the wiring for electrically connecting the switch, the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc., and the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. After being bundled together at the right side (axial support side) position, it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin, and is formed in such a manner that the gaming window 101 having a vertically long and substantially elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. Has been. The gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. In addition, a rectangular notch that allows insertion of the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110. A speaker mounting portion for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, a right side (open side) end of the front surface disposed at the lower right corner portion in front view and bulging forward The handle mounting portion for tilting the handle bracket to tilt backward, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion, and the upper side of the handle mounting portion. Thus, a lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short forward and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths of the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a shaft support attached along the back side of the side of the shaft support side of the door frame base body 110. Side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the gaming window 101 of the door frame base body 110 And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the lower side, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  An upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in an upper and lower direction on an upper surface and a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on its lower surface at upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152. Integrated. The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, a hook cover 165 that contacts the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 is provided at the lower rear side of the opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are disengaged, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The tray unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are shot through the ball feeding unit. Can be supplied to the device 650.

  The shape of the upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to protrude forward from the left to the center in a front view, and forward straightly from the center to the right. Protrusively formed. An operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed at the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion. . The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and for example, when a player presses the portion downward with a hand, the upper plate 314d bends downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the hand on the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged by bending the upper plate upper panel 314. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. In addition, when the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 is replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 for removing game balls stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302 in response to an operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and a lower dish ball removal button 354. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling out the game balls stored in the lower tray 302 in accordance with the operation of the lower tray ball through the lower tray ball removing hole 324b, and a CR (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 for operating the unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player. The player can accept the player's operation according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. The player can participate not only in the game ball driving operation but also in the game. It is something that can be done. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a press detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

  Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating a rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and a rotation for rotating in reverse.

[4-2-2. Rental unit]
The lending unit 360 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball rental button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball rental switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining frequency indicator 365c can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is disposed adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c so that the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized through the rental remaining display portion 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is attached to the inside of the ball rental unit 360. . When a ball rental unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and a lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the cash balance and prepaid card inserted after the remaining portion of the loaned portion is drawn back are returned. Yes. In addition, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball transport unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are supplied to the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan 302 by operating the upper pan ball release button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

  The ball feeding unit 580 is an intrusion port in which game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball opening of the door frame base body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball opening that opens below the intrusion opening and is open at the rear, and a box-like shape that closes the rear end of the front cover and opens the front, and penetrates in the front-rear direction The rear cover having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball that has entered from the intrusion port of the front cover to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball removing member that is pivotally supported and has a partitioning portion for partitioning between the entrance and the ball outlet on the rear side of the front cover, and the game balls on the partitioning portion of the ball removing member are hit one by one on the rear cover. Up and down between the front cover and the rear cover before feeding to the supply port 582a And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member accepts one game ball, while when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member accepts it. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, is cylindrical, and has a handle base whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that is rotatable relative to the handle base. Arranged at the front of the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the front of the rotary handle main body 506, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 fixed to the front of the rear of the rotary handle main body and being rotatable integrally with the rear of the rotary handle main body. And a front end cover 508 that is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body in cooperation with the handle base.

  In addition, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side, and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and the shaft member bearing portion is fitted. A potentiometer 512 that has a detection shaft portion that can be rotated together and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and is fixed to the front surface of the handle base so that the potentiometer 512 is sandwiched between the handle base and A switch support member having a through-hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a firing stop switch 518 attached to the touch switch 516 at a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member; A single-shot button that is pivotally supported with respect to the switch support member and operates the firing stop switch 518. And a handle that is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member and urges the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body to return to the original rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). And a return spring. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle. In addition, after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, it is rotated from the original rotational position to the limit rotational position (rotation end in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) that is the maximum rotational position in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. To do.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor. When the front part 506 of the rotary handle and the rear part of the rotary handle body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. . Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotational position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, so that the rotary handle A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launch intensity corresponding to (a match with) the rotation angle of the front of the main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle, that is, the rotation position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle. Yes.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is played by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or a ball hitting device 650 though it has been shot. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base that is open on the front side and has a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a first base that communicates with the first sphere inlet and expands to the right in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542. One ball passage, a second ball inlet 542c arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and having a larger opening than the first ball inlet 542a, and communicated with the second ball passage and inside the cover base And a second sphere inlet 542c that extends downward and is inclined toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. In the second ball passage in the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodating space that can be accommodated is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially upper center in the left-right direction and has a foul ball inlet 542e that opens upward, and a foul that communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage. And a ball passage. Further, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second bulb entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece contacts the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank and opening / closing the shutter 792. It can be in an open state.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base and penetrates in the front-rear direction. An outlet, and a second ball outlet that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to an upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through a notch portion of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower tray ball supply bowl in the tray unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet through the ball passage opening of the door frame base main body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 transfers the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a from the first ball outlet to the dish unit 300 through the first ball passage. It can supply to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. The plate unit 300 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply basket and the lower plate ball supply port.

  Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device When the game ball launched by 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, the game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. The foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. It can be done.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms an upstream (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space in the second ball passage and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be swingable by a game ball stored in the accommodation space. A member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that biases the swing member in a non-detection state by the full switch 550. The swinging member is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base, and the upper end is rotated leftward when viewed from the front. It comes to form. Further, the swing member is biased to a position where the swing member is in a substantially vertical state by a spring. Further, the swinging member is formed with a detection piece projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it can be determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 is a front view of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1, FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the game board 4 viewed from the diagonally upper right front, and FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the game board 4 viewed from the diagonally upper left front. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed obliquely from the lower left front. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board 4 and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded view for each main member constituting the game board 4 and viewed from the oblique rear. FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game region 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game region 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100 A plate-like game panel 1200 having a plurality of openings 1215 (see FIG. 13 and the like) penetrating in the front-rear direction and defining a rear end of the game area 1100.

  The gaming panel 1200 according to the present embodiment is a transparent panel board 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A and having a smaller outer shape than the front component member 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A. An opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  The gaming board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1215 of the gaming panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a left end of the front end of the back unit 3000. And a function display unit 1180 that is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and that is visible from the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 having a display screen (display area) which is attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the lower part of the back unit 3000 on the rear side A substrate holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the gaming panel 1200 so as to cover the A main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of, a.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the present embodiment includes the attacker units 2100A and 2100B arranged to extend rightward in front view from directly above the out port 1151 at the bottom of the game area 1100, and the left side of the attacker unit 2100A. A front side unit 2200 arranged along the inner periphery of the gaming area 1100, a gate unit 2300 arranged in a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left end of the gaming area 1100 when viewed from the front, And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged at a substantially central portion of the region 1100.

  Also, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. A back box 3010 in which an opening 3010b is formed, a back decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back effect unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010. In the back box 3010, the back lower effect unit 3400 is arranged below the opening 3010b, and is arranged between the back lower effect unit 3400 and the front front decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the back box 3010. The back lower right production unit 3600 is mainly provided. The front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position that can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210.

  Further, on the rear side of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 234) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 is accommodated, as will be described in detail later. A peripheral control board box 1910 is provided.

  In the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, a game area 1100 is divided into left and right by a center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1200. The outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (The inner circumference of the front component member 1110A) is a region having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game region 1100 (the front component member 1110A). And a plurality of obstacle nails (shown in the figure) on the front surface of the panel board 1210 in the left area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Are omitted).

  In the game board 4 in this embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (with a strength of a predetermined strength or more), the center role is played from the upstream side of the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. The material 2500 is sent to the sorting space 2530 side by the sorting approach passage 2545 and is sorted in the sorting space 2530 by the sorting valve 2551 in either the left or right direction. After being discharged, it is guided by the guide passage 2540 and returned to the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2541 opened to the upstream side of the big winning port 2103A of the attacker unit 2100A. By passing through the split space 2530, the open large winning opening 2103A can be received (winned) with a high probability.

  Further, in the game board 4 in the present embodiment, when a game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is turned into the gate unit 2300, the front side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2100A by a plurality of obstacle nails. , 2100B, or by entering the warp inlet 2504 on the way and being discharged directly above the first starting port 2101 through the stage 2510, the gate portion 2301, the general winning ports 2104, 2201, It is possible to enter the mouths 2101 and 2102 and the big winning mouths 2103A and 2103B (a plurality of big winning mouths) so that the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed. .

  That is, in the route on the right side with the center character 2500 in between, it is possible to enjoy the distribution of game balls in the distribution space 2530 and easy acceptance into the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B without contacting the obstacle nails. On the other hand, in the route on the left side with the center object 2500 in between, it is possible to entertain the dynamic movement of the game ball by jumping with the obstacle nail, depending on the player's preference, mood, skill, etc. It is possible to allow the game ball to be driven so as to pass through a favorite route, and to prevent the game ball from being monotonous in the operation and movement of the game ball.

[6. Function display unit]
FIG. 15A is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 15B is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. .

  Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 in the present embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 15A, a game consisting of one LED for displaying the current gaming state at the left end of the front view. A display for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of a game ball in the first start port 2101 comprising a status indicator 1183 (game status display means) and two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 A lottery result (first special lottery result) of the special symbol memory display 1184 and the first special symbol placed on the right side of the upper special symbol memory indicator 1184 and drawn by accepting a game ball to the first start port 2101 An upper special symbol display 1185 including one 7-segment LED for displaying as a first special symbol, and a second starting port 2 arranged diagonally to the right of the upper special symbol display 1185 A lower special symbol display 1186 including one 7-segment LED for displaying a lottery result of the second special symbol (second special lottery result) selected by receiving game balls to 02 as a second special symbol; The lower special symbol display 1186, which is composed of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186, includes a lower special symbol storage indicator 1187 for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Yes. Note that the lottery performed based on the reception of the game ball to the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 is a condition device that is a precondition for executing the jackpot game, unlike the so-called general jackpot lottery Whether or not to operate and the expected value of the award ball amount. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if such a lottery is won, the condition device only operates, and the jackpot gaming mode is not immediately started with this.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of suspensions related to the passage of the gate unit 2301 by a game ball arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for performing the game, and a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2301 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (the condition device is activated) ) ", The LED comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the open / close pattern of the grand prize winning openings 2103A and 2103B. A command indicator 1190, and a.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 according to the present embodiment is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, probability variation state, time shortening state, probability variation short state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Further, the upper special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball from the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol cannot be variably displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185. , The number of the first special symbol on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. In addition, the special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b when the number of holdings is two. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the lower special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 displays a game ball received in the second starting port 2102 when the second special symbol cannot be variably displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186. The number of the second special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol memory indicator 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs. The second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on / off. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 may receive the first special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game balls at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The second special lottery result is displayed, the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery is performed according to the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The player can recognize the result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, like the special symbol.

  Further, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game symbol passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In the present embodiment, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 16-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, the function display unit 1180 in this embodiment can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It is like that. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the upper special symbol memory display 1184, the upper special symbol indicator 1185, the lower special symbol indicator 1186, the lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 of the function display unit 1180, The normal symbol display 1189 and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 187). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, compared to the case where the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000) The position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different. Let the game hall clerk recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without confusion. It has become.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The upper special symbol memory display 1184 and the lower special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. Compared to the case of using, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 16 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board. FIG. 17 shows the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 16 and the board connected thereto, the power supply board 851 and the terminal board connected thereto. 18 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is inputted / outputted to / from a lending device connection terminal plate such as a game ball for relaying the electrical connection between the payout control board constituting the main board, the CR unit and the frequency display board. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 16 and a board connected thereto, and FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU. FIG. 21 is a block diagram of the periphery of the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal and sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 16, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes various control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control MPU 4100a as a built-in microprocessor, a main control input circuit 4100b to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc. Mainly includes a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring a sign of a predetermined power failure or an instantaneous power failure state (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”). Yes. The above-described main control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, and controls power-on processing that is performed when power is turned on.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a built-in RAM (corresponding to the “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). A watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud are also built-in. The above-described main control built-in RAM has, as part of its storage area, a jackpot determination random number storage area, a special symbol random number storage area, and a reach determination random number for each start storage information stored in a start storage information storage area described later. It has a storage area, random numbers for variation pattern 1, 2 and a random number storage area for variation type, and a starting storage information storage area and a transmission information storage area described later. Of these, the start memory information storage area includes a first start memory information storage area for the first special symbol and a second start memory information storage area for the second special symbol. In addition, the main control built-in RAM also includes a jackpot flag area capable of storing a jackpot flag value to be described later. As will be described later, the big hit flag represents not only a loss (00H) or a big hit (01H) but also a small hit (02H). Therefore, if the main control MPU 4100a accesses one storage area called the big hit flag area without accessing the small hit flag area in which the value of the big hit flag can be stored, the main control MPU 4100a only determines whether it is a big hit or lost. In addition, it is possible to grasp at the same time whether it is a small hit.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 4100b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  An upper start port switch 3022 for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, a lower start port switch 2109 for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102, and a game ball that has entered the general winning port 2104 A detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 to be detected and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. In addition, a distribution detection sensor 2580, a gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning port switch 3020 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the general winning port 2201, and a gaming ball in the big winning port 2103A. A count switch 2100A that outputs a detection signal when it is detected that it has been received, a count switch 2100B that outputs a detection signal when it is detected that a game ball has been received at the special winning opening 2103B, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects a fraudulent act using a magnet is attached to a predetermined number of main control MPUs 4100a via a panel relay terminal plate 4161 attached to the game board 4 and the main control input circuit 4100b. Input to the input port of the input port.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and the start port solenoid 2105, the attack solenoid 2108A, the attack solenoid 2108B, and the distribution drive motor 2558 (see FIG. (Not shown), each of which outputs a drive signal, or outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, thereby relaying the panel from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Through the child board 4161 and the function display board 1191, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol A drive signal is output to the memory display 1188, the game status display 1183, and the round display 1190.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function, so that payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the substrate 4110 or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switches 2100A and 2100B. The general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 are contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2350, so the upper start opening switch 3022, the lower start opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 Detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used as the upper start port 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning balls 2103A and 2103B are opened and game balls frequently enter, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switches 2100A and 2100B. . For this reason, proximity switches having a long life are also used for the count switches 2100A and 2100B. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter lifetime than the proximity switches are used as the general winning award opening switches 3020 and 3020.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payer ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a through the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Also, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data by the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the input from the main control input circuit 4100b to the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, a main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured with a main control CPU core 4100aa as the center, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM described above, a main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, and the like. The circuits are connected via the bus 4100ah (see FIG. 26). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 26). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec sends the command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100aea, and transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 is started as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously sends a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 22). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is turned off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored in the operation control signal 860a (RAM clear) when an operation switch 860a of a payout control board 4110, which will be described later, is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Signal) is output from the payout control board 4110 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. With this as a trigger, the main control MPU 4100a completes from the main control built-in RAM. Is erased (cleared).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., displays a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout, an operation switch 860a that also serves various functions, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 An error LED display 860b. Further, the operation switch 860a having a function as a RAM clear switch outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM based on a detection signal output by being operated. To do.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 17, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls relating to payout stores various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the payout operation of game balls, ROM that stores various commands, and temporarily stores data. A payout control MPU 4120a which is a microprocessor with a built-in RAM and the like, a payout control input circuit 4120b to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input, and a payout control for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. CR unit input / output circuit for exchanging various signals between the output circuit 4120c, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 4120e. The payout control MPU 4120a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated. The above-described payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since power-on, and controls power-on processing that is performed when power is turned on.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control program converts various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 as payer serial data transmission signals via the payout control I / O port 4120b. Receive serial data by serial method. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 860a as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output as a serial serial data signal to the reception port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port 4120b. In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 860a, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  In addition, when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal, specific frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives the door frame opening command (first door frame). When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal, specific frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. Command) (first specific frame release command sending means). On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal, specific frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program executes a door frame closing command (first door). When a detection signal (main frame closing detection signal, specific frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main frame) is output. (Close command) is output (first specific frame close command sending means).

  The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 4120b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches inputted to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded with the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later, and the information Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. In contrast, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function does not reset the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

  A detection signal from a ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 and a count switch 751 that detects a game ball flowing down in the prize ball device 740 is first a prize. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the prize ball case substrate 754 of the ball device 740 and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device 740 are first a rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740, a prize ball case inner board 754, and It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 4120b. To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Further, the detection signal from the full switch 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 851 and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 through the payout control input circuit 4120b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 860a. Signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the main control board 4100.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function is output. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4120d to the payout motor 744 via the prize ball case substrate 754, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for displaying the state of the machine 1 on the error LED indicator 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b. Or output.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). The fact that there is an abnormality in electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 4110) is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is clear” (specifically, Is based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and the payout rotator is difficult to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “counter switch error” (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the count switch 751 based on a detection signal from the count switch 751) is notified, and the number “ When “5” is displayed, it is informed that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is, it is informed that it is “full” (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full) When the number “7” is displayed, it is reported that “CR is not connected” (electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6). However, when the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (unpaid) is present)” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out is a predetermined number of balls) To that effect).

  Also, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1). The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and is transferred from the hall computer to the main control board 4100 that advances the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 2 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first the frequency display board 365 and the main door relay terminal board 880. And, it is input to the CR unit 6 through a lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the input / output circuit 4120e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c, such as a game sphere. The signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining frequency indicator 365c is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. Yes.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 22) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 4120a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 4120a uses the payout control built-in RAM. Completely erase (clear). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function to the main control board 4100.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout controller 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of CR unit 6 and gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and payout control board 4110, gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are supplied to the frequency display plate 365. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending switch 365a, which is a push button switch, mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the lending button 361 of the lending unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining frequency display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display section 363 of the rental unit 360.

  The ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 365b is pressed, the return switch 365b is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The remaining frequency indicator 365c is composed of three segment indicators arranged in a line. Of these three-digit segment indicators, one-digit segment indicator is sequentially driven, so-called dynamic lighting system is used for three digits. The segment display is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The remaining frequency indicator 365c includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicator, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (a total of 7 signals) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are connected from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball and the main door relay terminal board When input via the 880, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment indicators The contents due to the light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball rental state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining frequency indicator 365c through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 361 is pressed, and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connecting terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 4110 (the payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that the one payout operation has been started or ended, to the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. A ball terminal for connecting a device such as a game ball to output a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for outputting the ball or paying out the ball is possible or impossible. 869 to output to the CR unit 6. In addition, for example, when a hall clerk or the like is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return switch 365 b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores a remaining amount obtained by subtracting an amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball rental button 361 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power supplies. And a launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power control unit 855 operates the power switch 852 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. Power factor correction circuit 855b, smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improvement circuit 855b, and various direct currents for supplying power smoothed by smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates A power generation circuit 855d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a. The launch control circuit 857a includes an operation signal from a potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body shown in FIG. , A detection signal from the touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and whether or not to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's will A detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 to be detected is input via the handle relay terminal plate 192. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 857a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 4110. .

  While the firing control circuit 857a performs control to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 and to output it to the firing solenoid 654, By outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the handle relay terminal plate 192, one ball of the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 19, the peripheral control board 4140 performs presentation control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, while the peripheral control unit 4150 performs detection control of the touch state of the touch panel 480, and the game board side liquid crystal In addition to performing drawing control of the display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, music flowing from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 5 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5 A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls sound such as sound effects, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) that holds calendar information specifying date and time and time information specifying hour, minute, and second. Sound flowing from the control unit 4165, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It includes and the sound effects and the like volume control volume 4140a adjusted by the knob portion of the rotating operation volume (first volume control means), a. The peripheral control unit 4150 and the liquid crystal / sound control unit 4160 may be separate from each other as illustrated, or may be integrated. In this case, the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140 can be substituted by the liquid crystal and sound controller built-in sound source VDP 4160a or vice versa.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 19, the peripheral control unit 4150 for effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Manage schedule data that defines aspects Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for the purpose) and various information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 4150e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 4150c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 851, when the game board 4 is detached from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control. When this timer expires, a hardware reset is performed. That is, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 4150e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and therefore no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for transmitting various kinds of movable bodies provided in the game board 4 to the drive board 4170 is serialized for the motor drive board. Transmission from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the power of the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 or the like. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the serial I / O port for main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame. The signal is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a from the serial transmission circuit on the game board via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a which is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial Is. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag and a dedicated controller that transfers data independently between the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without using the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. The peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab reads / writes data from / to the storage device via the internal bus 4150ah, while the peripheral control serial I / O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa between the input / output devices such as the O port 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. In order to perform data transfer independently, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d. The peripheral control I / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, peripheral bus 4150ai, and external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control Various devices such as storage devices such as SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae are: lamp drive board serial I / O port, motor drive board serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, the hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral count CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count and is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag outputs various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, or an upper decoration in the door frame 5 The lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280 is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6 and the speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects flow from the provided speaker 130. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. .

  In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to produce a more powerful screen spread on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are completely used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume, and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (a sound source built-in VDP 4160a, which will be described later) is controlled by a program from the mute to the maximum volume So that the it can be adjusted to your. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speakers and doors housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although sound effects such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the sound volume is increased when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating (this embodiment) Then, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or the game state may be shifted to an advantageous game state. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b includes various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, various schedule data, and predetermined individual information (hereinafter, “ "Regulated individual information") is stored in advance (production control storage unit). The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging time-series screen data for defining the screen configuration, and the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is defined. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in a built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a. A track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects out of a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, or copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when various power control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later are turned on. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. The date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first powered on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. If December has already passed since the date when the liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on with the brightness of 75%, the brightness setting is set so that the brightness is further increased by 10%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to 75%, to 85%. Based on the luminance adjustment information included in the information, the luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted to light up.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 20, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy area 4150cd for storing a copy of the various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in peripheral control ROM 4150b, etc. Various control data copy area 4150ce for storing the copied data exclusively, and backup non-management target for storing the information not updated for backup among the various information updated by executing various control programs And a work area 4150cf.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf and cleared to zero. For the management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the supply of power is started by the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 (at power-on), the main control board 4100 (power-on command output) The power-on command (see FIG. 35) output by the means) instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 16 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on). Instructing the start of production when the operation switch 860a is operated ) It is sometimes cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is effect information (various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later is input) Bank 0 (1fr) for storing 1fr) exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The following 0 means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are stored in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the built-in sound source VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the camera can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is stored. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is a storage area to be set. The lighting data, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for output is set, and the reception command storage area 4150cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 and sets the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 41654a RTC described later). The storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various information acquired from the storage RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 4150cae is based on a command received from the main control board 4100 (the main control MPU 4100a). This is a storage area in which schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and history information. A storage area 4150caj and the like are provided. The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is set with door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is a game board for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 This is a storage area in which the side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. In the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, various information obtained by acquiring the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 is set. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai is a rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. And the like (for example, rotation history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400, and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405) Etc.) is a storage area to be set. On the other hand, the history information storage area 4150 caj has an operation history storage area in addition to a display history storage area described later. In this operation history storage area, information related to “specified handwriting” is stored in advance as an example of a specified contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 480 (effect control storage means). The information on the prescribed handwriting includes, for example, information on at least one of a change in thickness and a change in drawing speed due to increase or decrease in writing pressure during drawing, which is a straight line or a curve.

  The bank 0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the bank 0 (1 ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab has the door side light emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. -DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf has a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc that store specially copied production information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 4150 cb and backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is assigned to the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150cb is managed as a pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 4150cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at a high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 4150 cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cb and backup second area 4150cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area used normally. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), every time the 1 ms timer interrupt is generated, the backup first area 4150 cb and the backup second area 4150 cc are executed each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. Note that the content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is that the power-on command (see FIG. 35) from the main control board 4100 is stored in the RAM when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure). Instructs the start of the clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 16 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become so. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) which is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The following 0 means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with one pair of two banks, and one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Reference numeral 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and backup second area 4150dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal and sound control unit]
The drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, the music flowing from the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5, sound effects, etc. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that performs sound control incorporates a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. And a built-in sound source VDP (Video Display Processor) 4160a for performing drawing control of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, a display area (first display region) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device Various character data (or splices with sprite numbers) as display contents displayed in the display area 470 (second display area) Data) or a sound control ROM 4160b (production control storage means) for storing various sound data such as music and sound effects, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 using the serialized music and sound effects as audio data. And an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmission toward the.

  Further, in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image to be described later, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), an operation menu background image described later. Operation menu background image data used for display, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for icon display, main body frame rear image data used for display of main body frame rear image 740C in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 3 is visible when viewed from the player, service mode Service mode screen image data used for screen display, break timer setting screen Break timer setting screen image data used for shows, and break the screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is not limited to the suggested display object image data used for displaying the later-described suggested display object for prompting the user to operate the display button shown in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470. In addition, contact prompting display data used for displaying a touch prompting display to be displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 to prompt the user to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 480 (contact type input means) is stored (data). Storage means).

  Further, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b has display sizes for the display area (first display area) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area (second display area) of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Size-converted image data used for changing and displaying each common image is stored in advance (effect control storage means).

  In the peripheral control unit 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. To 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The peripheral control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After the output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the next screen data following the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is triggered when a V blank signal described later is input, Extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound source Output to built-in VDP 4160a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4150a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a one by one.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is inputted from the peripheral control MPU 4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the inputted screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate side character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. Thus, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side The image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is transferred from the channel CH2. And outputs to the side the liquid crystal display device 470. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and also outputs image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat.

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number The output channel is set and the music accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker, the sound effect, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. .

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a include effect sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode to be described later by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 4160a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it amplifies the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and serializes the amplified effect sound as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is set to an allowable maximum volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The volume of the set sound adjustment volume 4140a is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the synthesized performance sound is actually applied to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It amplifies up to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker to be accommodated and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Indicates the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track used and the sound of the notification sound incorporated in the track used. Is combined with the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub volume value for adjusting the volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually Amplification is performed up to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized to be audio data as audio data. The data is output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 A brief explanation of the control that plays the alarm sound to notify the hall clerk, etc. is as follows. First, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and the track in which this production sound is incorporated. Sound data, the sub-volume value set for the mute, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the notification sound volume is set to the maximum volume are synthesized. The volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually set in the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value becomes et flowing volume, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  In other words, the sound that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is only the notification sound of the maximum volume. At this time, since the production sound is muted, the production sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the production sound is used for the sound generation described above. Progressing according to schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period of time elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has progressed in accordance with the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute so far has been adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The volume value is set again (at this time, when the display button is operated to shift to the setting mode and the volume is adjusted, it is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the effect sound). The speaker flows from the speaker housed in the provided speaker box 820 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  As described above, when the production sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the injustice to the pachinko machine 1. When a notification sound flows to notify the store clerk or the like of the act, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 Although the silenced production sound flows from 130, it proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound is passed for a predetermined period and the speaker and door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 When the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 stops flowing, the production sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound starts to flow, but instead of the notification sound. So that the start flowing again from where it proceeds according to schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time and begins to flow.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 21, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using a plus signal and a minus signal. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data on the left and right sides, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 19, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured with the RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (timekeeping storage unit) that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a driving power source and a backup power source (second power source) for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b. The battery 4165b supplies power (second power) triggered by the reception of a power failure warning signal described later, separately from the main power supply (first power supply) that supplies power (first power). The supply of power (second power) may be stopped when the supply of power by the main power supply is started. In such a power supply form, the RTC 4165a is connected to the main power supply or the battery 4165b. Is supplied with power.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. The production based on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25, a screen on which a Christmas tree or a reindeer appears is unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year. For example, a screen for executing a countdown to reach the game can be unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment. The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 has a peripheral from the time point (first time point) when the peripheral control board 4140 receives a power failure detection signal output as a power failure notice from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Information related to the time until the control board 4140 receives the power-on command output from the main control board 4100 (second time point), that is, the power failure time is stored.

  On the other hand, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type. ing. The peripheral control MPU 4150a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is mounted with an LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and luminance setting information as date / time and hour / minute / second information that was first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the ON / OFF switching of the backlight or the ON when the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to be only.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, various tests such as a display test of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 are performed. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type, etc. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  Also, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode Is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be set to a desired value. It can be adjusted to brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal is installed. The luminance reduction accompanying the secular change of the display device 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the date. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired to specify the current date and time, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 that is currently set. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on and the current date and time, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5% which is the correction information acquired with respect to the luminance setting information. And when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has been powered on for the first time, December has already passed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 0b and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information that is set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a rotates the knob portion with the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by operating. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and the speaker and door frame 5 provided in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects flow from the speaker 130.

  As described above, music is adjusted from the speaker (sound output unit) accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 (sound output unit) provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob unit. And sound effects. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., it is likely that the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered more powerful, or that there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player) For example)) flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and notification sound are used for the turning operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the volume, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160 with built-in sound source) ) And it is capable of controlled and adjusted.

  The volume adjusted by this program (corresponding to an effect control program to be described later) is different from the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages, and smoothly from mute to maximum volume as shown in FIGS. 78 to 83 described later. It can be changed and set. Thus, for example, when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, a speaker (sound output unit) accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and Although production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 (sound output unit) provided on the door frame 5 are reduced, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating Regardless of the turning operation of the knob portion, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, for example, a maximum volume set in software) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, for example, the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400, for example. Further, by operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the waiting state and the demonstration is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode Is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. . This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the sound source with built-in sound source VDP 4160a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of the music or the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. There are two methods: adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation to adjust the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume. Since the volume adjustment volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the main body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period that is displayed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and this setting is performed. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. If the volume of the hall clerk feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the demonstration for a predetermined time and waits for a predetermined time (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is adjusted. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, this time, the player is seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and has been sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time. When the player feels loud and adjusts the volume adjusted by the player, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time will operate the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation of the operation unit 400. The unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[7-4-5. Touch panel and associated structure]
In addition to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, a touch panel 480 described later is connected to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a detection signal corresponding to the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 480 and receives the detection signal, the peripheral control board 4140 grasps the contact state of the operation surface of the touch panel 480 according to the contact information based on the detection signal. be able to.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. Note that the grounds (GND) of the various substrates and the grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 851 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 3 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on.

  The power supply board 851 includes a power supply control unit 855 and a launch control unit 857 as shown in FIG. The power supply control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The unit 857 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power supply generation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 and to the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a. The synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies 24 volt (AC 24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 855b. The power factor improvement circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power to create a direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes + 37V, and supplies the smoothed voltage to the launch control circuit 857a and the power generation circuit 855d of the launch control unit 857, respectively.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. A backup power source is supplied to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM).

  The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power supply, and plays a game ball with a launch strength (launch strength) corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle shown in FIG. The driving current for launching (launching) toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. 1 is adjusted and output to the firing solenoid 654, while a constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. Thus, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, and sends the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Take control.

  The power generation circuit 855d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c with + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. A power supply system supplied with + 5V is supplied as a + 5V power supply line, a power supply system supplied with + 12V is supplied as a + 12V power supply line, and a power supply system supplied with + 24V is supplied as a + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V created by the power generation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as will be described later. + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from + 12V from the payout control board 4110. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control filter circuit 4100h and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110 and is discharged. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 4110 is also electrically connected. That is, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward by the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1 Current flows to the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 returns to the payout control board 4110 and again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when +5 V generated by the power generation circuit 855d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as pay VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, but the stored contents are held by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. In other words, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g is such that current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode MD0, the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. Can be done. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g can create + 5V. When the charge is lost, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. Although the main control MPU 4100a does not operate because the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are held.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power source creation circuit 855d of the power board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. Two types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The three types of voltages + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral voltage is supplied. It is supplied to the control board 4140 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are supplied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 4, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the panel 4.

  The peripheral control board 4140 includes a + 3.3V generation circuit 4140b that generates 3.3V DC (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal module 470a of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the touch panel module 480a of the touch panel 480, respectively. . Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power source 1900b of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the backlight power source 470b of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, respectively.

  On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, four types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to various decorative boards and the like of the door frame 5.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 22, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. For example, + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). It is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110 at all.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 22, the main control board 4100 includes a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. In the main control board 4100, a power supply system supplied with + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is a + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Thus, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and the + 5V of the main control board 4100 is not connected. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this + 5V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100b and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d and the like, for example.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the main control board 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is inputted to the decoration board of the door frame.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltages applied to the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case where the voltage to be monitored is monitored, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power interruption such as a power failure or a momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 25 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 26 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. FIG. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 22 will be described, followed by the power source, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, main control MPU created by the main control board 4100. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a + 5V generation circuit 4100g, and In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 24, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz) )) Mainly.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 24, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V generated by the + 5V generating circuit 4100g is applied to the first terminal, the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component is removed from the third terminal. + 5V is output. + 5V applied to the first terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. Smoothed.

  + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded with the ground (GND). By connecting to, ripples are further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the like.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  In addition, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0. Are applied to the positive terminal. As a result, as described above, + 12V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 22 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and + 5V is generated. When the circuit 4100g cannot create + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a has Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 24, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor MC5. Be able to. Specifically, when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V), main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed.

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is a reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power line, and the other end is a capacitor that is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca is lower than the threshold value, the logic is LOW. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The attached main control output circuit 4100ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 24, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from the F terminal which is an output terminal by applying + 5V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and a clock signal of 24 MHz is input. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100b detects from the general winning award port switches 3020 and 3020, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switches 2100A and 2100B, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 860a provided in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, here, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a is input will be described.

[9-4-1. A circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) is input from the operation switch]
First, as described above, the operation switch 860a includes the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 4100a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to clear RAM within a predetermined period from power-on, and error cancellation after power-on (after a period during which the function is performed as RAM clear, that is, after a predetermined period elapses from power-on) And a function of performing Since the main control board 4100 does not have the error canceling function of the payout control board 4110, if an operation signal is input from the operation switch 860a within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control board 4100 receives the main control board 4100. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  The main control board 4100 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is not operated, while the logic from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is operated. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 4110 (detailed explanation of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 24, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 860a included in the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 10 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 10 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA.

  The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 860a. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 860a is operated. The operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI.

  A circuit including the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Is done. The main control MPU 4100a does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, an operation signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has a logic level HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on. The circuit is also turned on. As a result, the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Is done. The main control MPU 4100a instructs to clear the RAM for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because an operation signal from the operation switch 860 a is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, between the boards of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, it is higher than the control reference voltage +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper start opening switch 3022, and the lower start opening switch 2109 that are directly input to the main control board 4100 are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. On the other hand, detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switches 2100A and 2100B, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which are input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input to the input signal, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor, similarly to the operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 22, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failures or momentary power outages, and detects a power outage notice signal as a power outage notice in addition to the main control MPU 4100a when a sign of power outages or momentary power outages is detected. 4110 is output to the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 25, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The reference voltage input terminal REF terminal and the cathode terminal K terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref that is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21 (in this embodiment, 2.495 V is set). The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (convolved with the voltage by the capacitor MC20). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used for comparing the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. Monitoring of + 24V power outage or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 25, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 to which the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, has one end connected to the + 24V power line and the other end of the resistor MR21. Is connected to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistor MR22 is electrically connected and the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V1pf (in the present embodiment, set to 21.40V) when + 24V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts dropping from + 24V. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC 21 is an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded with the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to a PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the + 24V voltage is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21, is ground (GND). The signal with the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. Monitoring of + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitor voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 25, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied, has one end connected to the +12 V power supply line and the other end of the resistor MR24. Are connected to the other end of the resistor MR25, and the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 is connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and is smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are preset to the power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, set to 10.47V) when + 12V has a power failure or a momentary power failure, and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is preset by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 that is electrically connected, and one end being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The terminal is electrically connected to the PR terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the seventh terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal having the logic level LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal that is the output terminal. In addition, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and changes the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal that is inverted from the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal that is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal) On the other hand, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a logic LOW at the preset terminal PR when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set. When the signal is input, the state that the signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic) The state of outputting from the 1Q terminal is maintained).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in this embodiment, the 1D terminal that is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal that is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND). The circuit configuration is such that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the first terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure, and the + 12V power failure. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal that is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC 21 that monitors the instantaneous power failure is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. In an unconnected state.

  In the present embodiment, in the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of output in the main control-side power-on process described later performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal with the logic being LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. When the power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 cancels the latch state. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is inverted and the output terminal Is output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latch state, and latches the state where the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 4100cb outputs a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 4110 and also outputs it to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal.

  The main control input circuit 4100b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a has a D-type flip-flop as shown in FIG. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, one end of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC 23 (non-inverted buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is input to the input port PA of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned ON. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 becomes the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 4110 as a payout blackout signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via the resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, one end of the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. In the circuit 4120b, one end of the circuit 4120b is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected.

  A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is a preceding switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is a succeeding switch circuit, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the previous transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the previous transistor The MTR 21 is turned OFF and the preceding switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR 21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR 22, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR 32. As a result, the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is turned on, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR21 is turned ON. The front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Because the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. The transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the former-stage transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the latter-stage transistor MTR22, thereby turning on the latter-stage transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is issued. Input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result of the input, the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the succeeding transistor MTR22, thereby turning off the succeeding transistor MTR22. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. And are electrically connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, one end of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. In FIG. 19, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned OFF. The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is preset in the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, the logic becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D Since the signal is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 becomes the logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned ON. As a result, the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is generated when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). 4140 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 4100b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control board 4140 has one transistor, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is sent out to the payout control board 4110 No reset function to output as a power failure warning signal The control circuit 4100cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the peripheral control board 4140. The logic of the signal is inverted and is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 4100a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control board via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is connected. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is Wiring through a (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This is because the transistor MTR20 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control input circuit 4100b are connected to the main control board between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. 4100, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used to perform the power outage notice by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notice signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a. In order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting between the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, between the boards with 4110 and between the boards with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, Dispensing control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a Is performed blackout notice by the logic of a control reference voltage + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a receives serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 16 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, receive the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as a main payout serial data transmission signal and do not have a reset function. A main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function to the payout control board 4110 and transmitted from the TXB terminal to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. The peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-described main payment serial data reception signal A payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, and detection signals from various switches such as the upper starter switch 3022 shown in FIG. 16 are input via the main control input circuit 4100b. It is input.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a main payment ACK signal that indicates the completion of normal reception of the above-described payment serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Then, a main payout ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function to the payout control board 4110, or a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function for the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, or various displays such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Output to the equally and outputs a drive signal respectively to various indicator from resetting function main control output circuit 4100Ca.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 22 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the reliability is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly configured).

  + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, and the minus terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. The electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is electrically connected to the plus terminal. The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (first terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Thereby, for example, when power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC 10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in the present embodiment) shown in FIG. 24 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The unit 4100aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 4100aea as main peripheral serial data.

  The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control board 4100. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec and transmits it. When transmission is performed from the shift register 4100aea as main circumference serial data, a main circumference serial data transmission signal having a logic level of HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for 10 packets at the maximum is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. In the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and has the resistor MR51. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, one end of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded with the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit. When the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 on the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 to be grounded. In addition to being electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (No. 6 terminal) that is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (No. 4 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (No.5 terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the plus terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to + 5V by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Is input to the input terminal.

  Thereby, as described above, for example, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, +5 V supplied from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When electric power or a momentary power failure occurs, + 5V from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 is applied, so that the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is sent to the main control MPU 4100a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the signal without being lost or missing.

  When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 When is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW by the pulled voltage being pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Thus, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which + 5V that is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied, and the + 12V power supply line to which + 12V that is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 is applied. Measures are taken when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as a first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line decreases, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the plus terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50 are configured. Main function without reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 4100cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied as a communication voltage to the anode terminal of the diode MD50, and the positive terminal of the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the electrolytic capacitor MC50 as the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 is reduced by the terminals being electrically connected in parallel, the second auxiliary power supply is provided. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state where the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 from being broken, and to prevent omission of the command, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during a momentary power failure.

  A plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a reset that causes all of the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the non-functional main control output circuit 4100cb, the peripheral control board 4140 can omit a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb without missing them. And can be received reliably.

[10. Dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit, FIG. 28 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 29 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 28, and FIG. FIG. 31 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 32 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 27, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with + 5V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 22, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Then, + 5V from the power supply board 851 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The second terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5 V from which noise components have been removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripple is further removed and smoothed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The smoothed + 5V is applied to a power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, a VCC terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, a VDD terminal that is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the like. .

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal that is a power supply terminal of a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the other end. In addition to being electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5 V smoothed by removing noise components by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1. Are applied to the positive terminal. Thereby, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 22 is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is discharged. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, but the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM does not flow. The stored contents are held by applying the payment VBB.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 27, the payout control unit 4120 is reset as a peripheral circuit in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Payment control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 27, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay control terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. Be able to. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time has elapsed when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is a reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1, which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). The other end of the PC 6 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1, and the logic becomes HI. When the voltage inputted to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW when the voltage inputted to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and Each is input to the reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value. The attached payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded with a grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 27, +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, the smoothed + 5V is also applied to an OE terminal that is an output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. Note that the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619 shown in FIG. 17, and the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A circuit, a handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 17, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input via the power supply board 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, and the like. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch will be input, the circuit to which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit will be input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch is input and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. Note that the full switch 550 and various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 17 have an output terminal of an open collector output type. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal is input is substantially the same, here, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input will be described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where detection signal from door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the door frame 5 opened from the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 20 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a door opening signal.

  The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, one end of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21, and at the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. To the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 16 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are a door frame opening switch. A switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from 618.

  In the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR20 is The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The In addition, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, thereby causing the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Thus, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side, thereby turning on the transistor PTR21. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to the + 5V side so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. The switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned ON, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. While the outer frame door opening information output signal that is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, the main frame door opening signal that is logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, When the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned OFF, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 4120a. The outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

[10-2-3 (b). A circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducted) with the body frame 3 opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (cut) while 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, one end of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 that is grounded to the ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 that is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness). Electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 through the resistor PR29, and the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, one end of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above and shown in FIG. 16 via a wiring (harness). The main control board 4100 is electrically connected. Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line is electrically connected. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as the main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, The contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 are configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts that repeatedly turn ON / OFF repeatedly.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned on / off by a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619.

  In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, whereby the transistor PTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Thus, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the outer frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. Input to the external terminal board 784. In the state where the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. As a result, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is generated in the main control board. 4100 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784. When the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned OFF, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 are used. Even in this case, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or It can be determined that a state in which the player has opened the main body frame 3 does not occur during a normal game, and an outer end frame door opening information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. This outer edge because it is designed to be entered The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the outer frame door opening information output signal. Although it cannot be determined whether or not the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, there is a state in which the player does not occur during normal games that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 are opened. It can be determined that it has occurred.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 even if it is in a conductive state, the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conductive). 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, a main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even in the event of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  When the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (cut) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The body frame opening switch 619 ′ is turned on (conductive) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected due to some cause and the switch is turned off (cut), the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, and the main body is not used for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (cut), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. As described above, the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the body frame opening switch 619 ′ can output a main frame door opening signal to the main control board 4100 even when a normally open switch is used or a disconnection occurs. An outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit that receives a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
A transmission line for transmitting a payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and a resistor. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, one end of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Dispensing control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851, and if a power failure or power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a blackout notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at + 12V and + 24V. As described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. One of a condition that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and a condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is input to the dispensing control board 4110. When the condition is satisfied, the subsequent transistor MTR22 Payout power failure warning signal of the voltage applied to the collector terminal wiring logic by via (harness) is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above it becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous interruption of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V. In some cases, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side to turn off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is an indication of a power outage or a momentary power failure, a payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 40 by a payout power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 4100e. Is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic at the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Thus, when there is an indication of a power failure or instantaneous power failure at a voltage of +12 V and / or +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure at voltages of +12 V and +24 V, a payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. This is because, as described above, when there is an indication of a power failure or a momentary power failure at a voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of + 12V and + 24V power failure or instantaneous power failure, a power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The logic of the payout blackout signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the blackout notice signal input to the main control MPU4100a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit that receives detection signal from full switch]
A detection signal from the full switch 550 provided in the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is sent to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. Have been entered. The output terminal of the full switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The pull-up resistor PR44a is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and electrically connected to the first terminal of the full-switch three-terminal filter PIC50. This full-tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite.

  The second terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank switch three-terminal filter PIC50 via the resistor PR44b. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. Thereby, the detection signal of the full tank switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. In addition to the resistor PR45 being electrically connected, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 that is grounded to the ground (GND), and has one end connected to the ground (GND). The other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40 is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC 40 (non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and the signal waveform input to one (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). The MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input as a full signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off in response to a detection signal from the full switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is paid out via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851. When the control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851, and a signal whose logic is LOW is sent out. Input to the control board 4110.

  When the storage space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is pulled on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that has been pulled up to + 12V by the up resistor 44a and whose logic has become HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned ON and the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, a full signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and becomes logic LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the full-tank signal whose voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47 and becomes logic HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to a switch circuit constituted by the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full switch three-terminal filter PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. It is a circuit configuration that is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5, the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 provided in the prize ball device 740 attached to the main body frame 3. Compared to the above, the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and it is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the storage space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. The payout control MPU 4120a If it is determined that the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the drive control of the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped. To do. In other words, when noise enters a transmission path (transmission line) that transmits a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped and the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body is stopped, or the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled even though the storage space is full with the stored game balls. If the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by rotating the payout rotator and continuing to pay out the game ball, the payout rotator itself can no longer rotate and the payout motor 744 The load is abnormal, the payout motor 744 is overloaded, abnormally generates heat and breaks down, or the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted to the rotary motion of the payout rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is adopted so that the noise component is first removed from the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. .

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit that receives operation signal from operation switch]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous-stage transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via the resistor PR52. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR52, one end of the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40C) without inversion). Via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the downstream transistor PTR43 is changed by turning ON / OFF the upstream and downstream transistors PTR42 and PTR43. Is input.

  The third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the previous transistor PTR42 via the resistor PR49. The voltage is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, one end of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input as the RAM clear signal to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 860a repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. Is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a previous-stage switch circuit, and a circuit composed of the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a subsequent-stage switch circuit, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is connected to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. A function for clearing RAM within a predetermined period from the time and canceling an error after the power is turned on (after a period during which the function is performed as a RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on) And has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing a RAM clear within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the time of turning on the power). In the function for performing error cancellation in (), an error cancellation signal is generated.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes HI by pulling up the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 is transmitted to the previous stage transistor. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned ON, and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned ON, and is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 43, which is a voltage applied to the base of the subsequent stage transistor PTR 43. As a result, the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is turned OFF, and the rear-stage switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 at the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal in which the output terminal of the operation switch 860a is the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the logic becomes HI is output from the transistor PTR44. The transistor PTR44 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned OFF and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. Thereby, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic clear signal HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The main control MPU 4100a determines that the RAM clear signal for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is not instructed when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW by pulling down the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, to the ground (GND) side is the transistor in the previous stage. When input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the previous stage transistor PTR 42 is turned OFF and the previous stage switch circuit is also turned OFF, and the voltage applied to the base of the rear stage transistor PTR 43 is applied to the collector terminal of the previous stage transistor PTR 42. As a result, the subsequent transistor PTR43 is turned on and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is canceled. Judge that it is an instruction.

  In addition, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, an operation in which the logic becomes LOW because the third and fourth terminals, which are output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear to erase information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied thereto, respectively. The ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power source switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4120da. It has come to be. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, via the Zener diode PZD60, and electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. Based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor driving voltage, and the third terminal which is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60 through the Zener diode PZD60 The power is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, and supplied to the dispensing motor 744.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In the present embodiment, the sixth terminal and the seventh terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The second terminal, the fourth terminal, the ninth terminal, and the eleventh terminal that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. If the payout motor drive signal is input to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the dispensing motor 744. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63, the drive ICPIC60. The signal is output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals. These drive pulses are generated by switching excitation currents that flow through the phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the dispensing motor 744, and rotate the dispensing motor 744. Note that a back electromotive force is generated when the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching. When this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. As a protection, the above-described Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal before the drive ICPIC 60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 18 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and one payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and a ground LG created from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 18 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Via the terminal board 869, an EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended, and a PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And are output. As shown in FIG. 31, an input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are incorporated).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC 70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. In some cases, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 that is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. 27, the ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80A) without inversion). Are electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 that is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). Note that when the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the collector terminal of the power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 851 as a CR connection signal.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 70 is turned OFF, and the switch circuit is also turned OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. The

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off and pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit also It will be turned on. As a result, the CR connection signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 851 through the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply substrate 851. The

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR 71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 851. Is done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. The BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80B) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is set to LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. Then, the BRDY signal whose logic applied to HI is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78 and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79 in addition to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC 72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photo coupler PIC 72 is turned off. Yes. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. A non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 (the non-inverted buffer ICPIC 80 includes eight non-inverted buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 80C) without inverting it). To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and when the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. A BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC 72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the BRQ logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, and the payout control output circuit without reset function. 4120cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. The photocoupler PIC 73 is turned OFF when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal via the non-reset payout control output circuit 4120cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 via the pull-up resistor PR83 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  EXS output when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82 and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and EXS in which the logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered. One end of the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, and when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the inside of the CR unit 6 by a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input as PRDY to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  PRDY output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives serial data from the main control board 4100 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b as shown in FIG. Is done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is a serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, serial data to be sent to the main control board 4100 is sent as a payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function. A payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function to the main control board 4100.

  Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a has the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout blackout signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) For example, a main pay ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs the completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the ball break switch 750, the count switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like shown in FIG. 17 are respectively input via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  On the other hand, the EXS signal and the PRDY signal described above are output from the output terminals of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without reset function and The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the voltage switching signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Or outputs a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and outputs a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition, for example, a payer ACK signal for notifying completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function pays off. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 17 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to drive the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Is output to the error LED display 860b.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32A, the payout control board 4110 has the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like. Is output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has a 15 round big hit information output signal, a two round big hit information output signal, etc. Jackpot information output signal, probabilistic fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and middle information output signal, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A signal or the like is input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32B, in addition to the outer frame door opening information output signal described above, an award ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. In addition to the jackpot information output signal such as the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal via the payout control board 4110 from the main control board 4100, the probability changing information output signal and the special symbol display information output A game information signal such as a signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, an hour and middle information output signal, and a start opening prize information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors a player's game and the like. When the 15 round jackpot information output signal or the 2 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer counts the number of jackpots (two round jackpots). ) And the number of jackpots with 15 rounds (number of jackpots for 15 rounds) is the total number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2 rounds of big hits or the number of occurrences of 15 land big hits from the total number of big hits, so the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is impossible to grasp whether it is a big hit of 2 rounds or a big hit of 15 rounds. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and a player selects whether or not to play a game with reference to the number of occurrences of the big hit gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

  However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed in the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of two rounds of big hits, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of big hits will occur. 15 round hits may not occur easily. As described above, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more eager than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the two round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can generate the number of occurrences of the two round jackpot, The number of occurrences of 15 round big hits can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is the big hit of two rounds or the big hit of 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. The number of occurrences of jackpots and the number of rounds of jackpots for 2 rounds can be displayed separately or only the number of rounds of jackpots for 15 rounds can be displayed as the number of occurrences of jackpot gaming states, which may increase the player's gambling ambition more than necessary. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer in the period from when the 2-round jackpot is generated until it is finished, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also a 15-round jackpot. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from occurrence to termination. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. When the 15 round jackpot is generated and the 15 round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period when the 15 round jackpot occurs, such a 2 round jackpot information output signal and 15 round jackpot information are output. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[10-4. Touch panel module and its peripheral part]
FIG. 33 shows an example of signal exchange between the touch panel module 480a shown in FIG. 23 and its peripheral part.

  The touch panel module 480a (control means) is connected to the peripheral control board 4140 connected to the main control board 4100, and controls the touch panel 480 (contact type input means). The touch panel module 480a includes a touch sensor 482 and a touch panel controller 481 having the following control register 481a. That is, the control register 481a can store a threshold value for contact determination as a threshold value of capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 480 is in a non-contact state (determination threshold storage unit).

  The touch sensor 482 detects the capacitance change at any position on the contact surface, and measures the capacitance before and after the change, while representing the coordinates of the position and the electrostatic capacitance. A detection signal is output as a signal representing the capacity (contact detection means). When the touch panel controller 481 receives this detection signal, the touch panel controller 481 acquires a coordinate value (hereinafter referred to as “detection coordinate value”) representing the position or the range thereof, while the capacitance (hereinafter referred to as “detection electrostatic capacitance”) indicated by the detection signal. It is determined whether or not “capacity” is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a. As a result of such comparison, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the touch surface controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in a non-contact state, while the detected capacitance is When it determines with it being more than the threshold value for contact determination, it determines that a contact surface is in a contact state (contact state determination means).

  When the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in a contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including detection coordinate values on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  By the way, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko machine, in many cases, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when power is turned on, and then the sensitivity is operated (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-192783, hereinafter “ References)). Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process as described above, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, it may be considered that the sensitivity gradually becomes inappropriate at first glance. Here, for example, a capacitance type touch panel is superior in durability to a low dura film type touch panel, but the peak point of change in capacitance is recognized as a touch point. In addition, it is necessary to adjust the contact sensitivity that changes in response to environmental changes to be uniform and constant.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the touch panel module 480a receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the outside (for example, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140), the touch sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 480 is adjusted. To do. That is, in the touch panel module 480a, when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the touch panel module 480a updates the touch determination threshold stored in the control register 481a based on the threshold setting command, thereby touching the touch panel. The contact sensitivity according to 480 is adjusted. Specifically, when touch panel controller 481 receives this threshold setting command, touch panel controller 481 acquires a capacitance based on a detection signal output from touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as a contact surface of touch panel 480. Is determined as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  After that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new threshold value for contact determination updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the contact surface is determined to be in a non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch determination threshold value for determining the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 480 is updated at a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) from the outside. Therefore, if the output timing of the threshold setting command is appropriately controlled, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 480 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing (calibration). For this reason, if the threshold setting command arrives at an output timing that may affect the game by the player, the detection of the contact state on the touch panel 480 is always appropriate without affecting the game. It can be an operating mode.

  The timing at which the touch panel controller 481 should receive the threshold setting command is, for example, that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the change display of the special symbol has ended, and the player has stopped playing the game. The timing with low possibility that it is contacting the operation surface of the touch panel 480 can be illustrated. In other words, such contact sensitivity adjustment is performed as much as possible during the special symbol variation display that may be performed using the touch panel 480, and is performed when the variation display ends. Yes.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 480 is of a capacitance type and can be stored in a large number of game balls and is provided on the upper plate 301 where static electricity is likely to be generated. Sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing accordingly, and it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such changes in the surrounding environment and not by the player's operation. It becomes difficult to do.

[11. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34 is a table showing examples of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 35 is a table showing examples of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 37 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 35, and FIG. 37 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[11-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects from the various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switches 2100A and 2100B shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 744 of the pachinko machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper dishes 301 and the lower dishes 302. When such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), the main control is performed. Command 10H to command 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from the board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated. In 11H, two prize balls are designated, and in command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game ball by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device for directly paying out game balls as a lending ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as a storage tray) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the payout control board 4110 from the main control board 4100. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls to pay out the game balls by driving the payout motor 744 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 34C, and the self check is designated in this command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[11-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. As shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, ordinary synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display, test related, and others. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the status (1) has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and indicates the command type (STTS value) and a mode (MODE value) having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and showing variations in performance.

  For these status (STTS value) and mode (MODE value), values of a plurality of transmission information storage areas (hereinafter also referred to as “RWM”) secured in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM are used. That is, among the 8 bits of each command, for example, the upper 3 bits use the value of the first transmission information storage area (RWM1), while the lower 5 bits use the value of the second transmission information storage area (RWM2). In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the command can be disassembled bit by bit to grasp the status and mode.

[11-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the upper start switch 3022 shown in FIG. 16, and is divided into the functions of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the upper special symbol display 1185, it is composed of commands with names of special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization production end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command is a command for instructing the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is used for designating off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit Command. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is a command for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the change state designation command is a command for instructing a transition to at least one of the probability and the short time state.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation start, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect starts. The synchronized production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control timer interruption process described later (command transmission means).

[11-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the lower start switch 2109 shown in FIG. 16, and as shown in FIG. 35, the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the lower special symbol display unit 1186, it is composed of commands having names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 35, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is an instruction to start the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the big winning opening 1 is started during the opening of the big winning opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the big winning opening of the attacker units 2100A and 2100B) 2103A, 2103B during the N-th round opening or opening start), and the winning opening 1 closing display command starts the closing of the winning opening 1 between rounds (a big winning of the attacker units 2100A, 2100B) The mouths 2103A and 2103B are closed during the round or start of closing), and the winning prize 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 are counted (count switches 2100A and 2100B shown in FIG. 16). Of the game balls entered into the grand prize winning openings 2103A and 2103B detected by Is intended to convey a few), big hit ending command, which instructs the jackpot ending start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (when the small hit is made, the big winning ports 2103A and 2103B of the attacker units 2100A and 2100B are displayed). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium / large prize winning effect (a game ball that has entered the big winning holes 2103A and 2103B during the small hit count switch 2100A). , 2100B), the small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened for the 1st to 16th rounds (attacker units 2100A, 2100B). Is displayed when the Nth round of the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B is opened), and the closing indication command for the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B of the attacker units 2100A and 2100B). The winning prize 1 count display command is transmitted when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count to the winning prize opening 1 is changed (when the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B of the attacker units 2100A and 2100B are opened and large). The game balls that entered the winning openings 2103A and 2103B are counted. 2100A and 2100B), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is displayed when the big winning opening is opened (the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B of the attacker units 2100A and 2100B). Sent when open).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is issued when the small hit is released (when the big winning ports 2103A and 2103B of the attacker units 2100A and 2100B are opened at the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit medium / large winning prize (when a game ball that has entered the big winning holes 2103A, 2103B during small hit is detected by the count switches 2100A, 2100B). The small hit ending command is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 35, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power-on shown in FIG. 17). Or give instructions).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. When executed, a power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interruption process.

[11-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 16, and as shown in FIG. The command 1189 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to a pair of movable pieces 2105 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2105. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named ending per usual figure. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command is a normal power open start (a pair of movable pieces 2105 are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2105 is driven by the start opening solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-7. Notification display]
36. As shown in FIG. 36, the notification display section includes commands having names such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when the winning ball is won in addition to the big win (when the condition device is in operation) (the game ball enters the big winning port 2103A of the attacker unit 2100A when the winning ball is not hit, and the game ball is displayed. When the count switch 2100A detects, or when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2103B of the attacker unit 2100B and the game ball is detected by the count switch 2100B), an instruction to start a prize abnormality notification is given. . The connection abnormality display command is, for example, instructing the start of connection abnormality notification when there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The display command is, for example, disconnected when the electrical connection between the main control board 4100 and the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2100A, the count switch 2100B, or the like is disconnected or short-circuited. The instruction to start the short circuit abnormality display is instructed, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is an instruction to start the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. .

  The door frame opening command is sent from the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door frame closing command is used for the door frame closing command based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. When it is in a closed state, an instruction to end the door opening notification is given. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch 619. In the closed state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed to end.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a big winning opening other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. The command is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switches 2100A, 2100B, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. The door frame opening command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The door frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 36, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 36, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 36, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command is a command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140. Examples of such test commands include various substrates such as the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp driving substrate 4170, the motor driving substrate 4180, and the frame decoration driving amplifier substrate 194 shown in FIG. List the commands that perform the inspection.

  In this main control board 4100, test command ports are assigned one by one for the convenience of the hardware, so that it is difficult to manage on the hardware side. Ports that can be managed by a software timer are assigned to a predetermined port among a plurality of ports, while those that can be managed by a flag are assigned to specific ports.

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or a momentary power failure and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 36, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and A command with a name of special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect is included. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect. When the game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022, Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 2109, it instructs to start the production when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102. Instructs the state transition to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is changed from a high probability state (corresponding to a probability variation state described later) to a low probability state (corresponding to a normal game state described later). The special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol storage command) is a special symbol 1 hold 0-4 pieces (a game ball enters the upper start port 2101) The special symbol display 1118 on the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls not yet used for the special symbol variation display (the number of holdings), and the special symbol 2 storage command (special symbol storage command) is: 0-4 special symbols 2 reserved (the number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable symbol display of the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191 after a game ball has entered the lower starting port 2102) ), The normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 normal symbol 1 hold (the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 still displays the normal symbol variation display). The number of balls not used (the number of holdings)) is transmitted, and the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding determination instruction command) is the special symbol 1 holding is the upper special feature of the function display board 1191. Prior to being used for the variable display of the special symbol on the symbol display 1185, it is instructed to start the pre-reading effect to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 hold. The special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding judgment instruction command) is pre-read before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the special symbol variation display on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191. This command is for instructing the start of a pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the symbol 2 hold. In the present embodiment, these special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect commands and special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect commands are also collectively referred to as “special symbol storage pre-reading effect commands”.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening prize (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or the lower start opening switch 2109 (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. 5 is transmitted mainly from the speaker 130 provided in order to notify the fact by voice, and the change shortening operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the end of the change after confirming the change of the specified number of changes (the elapse of the stoppage period) The high-probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the lapse of the stoppage period). The special symbol 1 storage command is used when the special symbol 1 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and is still used for the special symbol change display on the special display 1118 on the function display board 1191. In the state where there is an unreserved number, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the retained number increases, the upper special symbol display 1185 is used to display the variation of the special symbol from the retained number. The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of special symbol 2 actuated balls is changed (a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the lower special symbol of the function display board 1191). In the state where there is a number of holdings that are not yet used for the change display of the special symbol on the display unit 1186, when the number of holdings increases when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 or when the number of holdings increases, the lower special symbol table The normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350). In the state where there is a reserve number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2350 and the reserve number increases, or the reserve Is sent to the normal symbol display 1189 when the number of reserved symbols decreases and the number of reserved symbols decreases. Is sent when the game ball enters the mouth 2101 and the number of held balls increases, and the special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of the special symbol 2 action held balls increases (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102) Sent when the number of balls on hold increases. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is received at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 or from the lower start opening switch 2109. (When a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 based on the detection signal), the speaker is housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly by voice. Although it is transmitted in order to notify the effect, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 19 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraudulent acts is monitored. It is a thing of the specification to use also for. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start port winning command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. There is also a specification that does not notify by voice.

[11-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 37, each command from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared, and bit 0 (B0, “B”) in the ball breakage. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) is provided with a rounded ball, counting switch error and retry error. In the rounded ball, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2). Value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) in the case of a retry error. Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 17 has a problem. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and a value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[12. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 16 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 38, and FIG. 40 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[12-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, and a big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit judgment random number A random number for determining an initial value for determination, a random number for determination of reach for use in determining whether or not a reach (reach out of reach) is generated when a big hit gaming state is not generated, and the upper special symbol display shown in FIG. The random display pattern random number used for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special display when the big hit gaming state is generated. The jackpot symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display 1186 and the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number are used. Jackpot initial value determination random number or the like for symbols are provided that. Note that the big hit symbol random number described above is a small bonus symbol random number used to determine the small bonus symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol indicator 1185 and the lower special symbol indicator 1186 when the small hit gaming state is generated. Also used as On the other hand, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number described above is also used as a small hit symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the small hit symbol random number. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol for use in determining whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 and an initial value for the random number for determining per normal symbol are used. Random numbers for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, random numbers for the normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed by the normal symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. ing.

  For example, the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is configured by hardware built in the chip, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 0 as the minimum value). Is updated within the value 32767) as the maximum value, and the range from this minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 every time a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value (value 0) toward the big hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the big hit is obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determining the big hit. On the other hand, the random numbers for normal symbol determination and the initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol determination described above are also updated by the same method as the method for updating the jackpot determination random number described above.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is counted up, the initial value for determining the big hit determination is determined in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number. The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-off process (when the power is turned off) does not match The main hit MPD 4100a shown in FIG. 16 takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM and updates the big hit determination random number based on the extracted ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In other words, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. As described above, the value set as the initial value for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and the ID that is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM and the first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored Thus, the second security measure of deriving the same fixed value and the two steps of security measures are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a big hit. For example, a person who illegally acquires a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is assigned a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a ′ provided in the other game board 4 ′. That is, in the other game boards 4 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the jackpot determination random number matches the jackpot determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in the other game board 4 ', that is, the other pachinko machine 1'. Even if it is aimed at a start winning that a momentary stop occurs at every predetermined interval and a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 at every predetermined interval, a big hit gaming state may be generated. Can not.

[12-2. Operation of counter with initial value update type]
In the initial value update type counter, when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU 4100a takes out the ID code from the built-in nonvolatile RAM, and based on the taken out ID code. An initial value deriving process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value as the first cycle. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit determination random number as the initial value determination random number for the big hit determination The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained by this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter As the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number updates a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a value 0 as a minimum value to a value 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either of the low probability and the high probability. Is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit determination value range (big hit determination range), a value 10 to a value 209 are set for a low probability, and a value 10 to a value 339 are set for a high probability. That is, with a low probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 200, and with a high probability, the number of random numbers (big hit determination random numbers) that are jackpots is 330. Here, in this embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random number values acquired at the same time is the 200, except when the acquisition times of random number values are different. Other than that, for example, a prime number. In other words, in this embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from the big hit determination random number (for example, the value of the random number for determining the big hit game mode acquired when the game ball passes through the gate 2575 described later) The number of random numbers that are jackpots can be made non-prime. In the present embodiment, the small hits described above are, for example, big hit determination random numbers corresponding to the number (50) of the number of big hit symbols (200) with low probability divided by four.

  Considering the case where such a big hit judgment value range is set, the minimum and maximum values are the same regardless of whether the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is low probability or high probability. Is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384). In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the time when it becomes the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and this value 10 When the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767) is compared, the probability of the former period being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process is much lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 for low probability, value 339 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). And the range from the value after this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter Compared with the range, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low. Then, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is obtained by some method, and the game ball is started upward by irradiating the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102 with radio waves. If a fraudulent act is performed as if entering the mouth 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the values of the jackpot determination value range (the jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (the jackpot determination range) is from an intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in either the low probability or the high probability. If it is set to the range close to the maximum value side, the initial value update type counter value immediately before the value that becomes the first value in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value becomes zero. A period extending to the time when the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and a period extending from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) And the former period is much more likely to be drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). And the range from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) in the range of jackpot determination value (big hit determination range). Of these values, one of the values becomes a value drawn by the initial value lottery process, and is set in the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number. Counting up, and then counting up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained by this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter Then, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value. Is set to a range close to the initial value update type counter value from the timing when the value becomes 0, the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (low value) The period extending to the time when the probability becomes 32667 and the value 31767) with high probability is irregular and rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 is illegally acquired by some method, and the game ball is raised by irradiating the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if an illegal act pretending to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot determination value ranges (the jackpot determination range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. Until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle from the minimum value (first value) of the range from the initial value to the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the third cycle from time T0 is time T1, and time T1 is shorter than time T0. . The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the big hit determination value range (big hit determination range) in the fourth cycle from time T1 is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. . In this way, in the initial value update type counter, fluctuation is given to the time when the counter to be updated becomes the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity) The player is not perceived by the player).

[12-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control program described above performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. . When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 25 (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. In step S11, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function by setting the logic to LOW. Is done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S12), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-described D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input after the power is turned on in step S14 until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the main control program applies power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, the logic is HI, and the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function. Is input. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state that the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal that is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal.

  Subsequent to step S15, the main control program makes a state in which RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 being operated to the main control MPU 4100a. Depending on whether or not it is done. Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the RAM is not instructed to be cleared when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the instruction to perform the RAM clear is made and it is determined that the operation switch 860a is operated.

  In step S16, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the main control program sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system for controlling the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. Waiting to boot). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Subsequent to step S26, the main control program calculates the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off), which will be described later, as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). If they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, “recovery” means not only the state where the power is turned off but also the state where the power is turned on, the state where the power is restored after a power outage or a momentary power failure, and the detection that a high frequency has been applied. It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, the main control program stores all the main control built-in RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control control side RAM clearing process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 860a described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Also, the main control MPU 4100a performs processing to erase the game information when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is instructed to clear the RAM, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number based on the taken out ID code, it is always An initial value deriving process for deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the big hit determination initial value determining random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determining random number.

  Subsequent to step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In the RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 35 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and initial setting is performed is created. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 36 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms. At the same time, the main control program initializes the winning flag provided for each of the big winning openings 2102A and 2102B to “0” and pays out the payout provided for each of the big winning openings 2102A and 2102B. The execution flag is set to “1”. These winning flag and payout execution flag will be described later.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time elapses from when the power is turned on, that is, when the main process on the main control side is started, an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 860a (operation switch) is displayed. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the error sharing navigation command for the detection signal input with the operation of the operation switch 860a for a predetermined time from the power-on as described above, based on the concept of time sharing. When the input is triggered, the RAM clear process is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error canceling navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. In other words, the operation switch 860a (error release unit) that should have been used to release an error that has occurred in relation to the payout operation is used as a game storage unit instead of a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) functions as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the ball dispensing operation.

  Next, the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-winning random number update process (step S50). In this non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S50, the process returns again to step S46, and the main control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, and this power failure warning notification. If there is no signal input, non-winning random number update processing is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. Note that the processing in steps S46 to S50 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thus, the main control program can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program includes the start-port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, shown in FIG. The drive signals output to the lower special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. are stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S56, the main control program sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S58). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S52 to step S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by power recovery thereafter.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[12-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 40 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. (Step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program, for example, detects each of the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count switch 2100A that detects a game ball that has entered the ball 2103A, a detection signal from the count switch 2100B that detects a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2103B, and a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 A detection signal from the upper start opening switch 3022 to detect, a detection signal from the lower start opening switch 2109 to detect a game ball that has entered the lower start opening 2102, and a gate switch 2352 to detect a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 Detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraud using the magnet shown in FIG. And a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 that informs the payout control board 4110 that the payout control board 4110 has normally received a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process to be described later, and stores them in the input information storage area as input information. To do. Further, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 and a detection signal from a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding start opening command shown in FIG. 36 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In other words, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, A start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

  In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count for detecting the gaming balls that have entered the large winning openings 2103A and 2103B. Detection signals from the switches 2100A and 2100B, detection signals from the upper start opening switch 3022 that detects the game balls that have entered the upper start opening 2101, and lower start opening switches 2109 that detect the game balls that have entered the lower start opening 2102 , And the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as a first time when this switch input process is started, for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls.

  Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning award port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switches 2100A and 2100B, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by reading twice, a total of two times of reading, which is compared twice for the first to third times, and twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time. Since erroneous detection can be avoided, detection signals from the general prize opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switches 2100A and 2100B, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are displayed. Reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 is normal for various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). When it is determined whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that it has been received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determining random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up.

  For example, the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number is an initial value updating type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value as the minimum value). 0 to the maximum value is updated within the value 32767), and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the big hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up. When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up within the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by the winning random number update process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the big hit determination random number. It should be noted that the above-described random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are processed on the main control side power-on processing (main control) shown in FIG. Update processing in step S50 in the main main processing) and the winning random number update processing in step S78 in the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are updated each time the interrupt timer is generated. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated after the process time becomes uneven. , The big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number in step S50 Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Subsequent to step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, the main control program creates the prize ball command shown in FIG. The self-check command shown in FIG. 34 for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. The main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payout serial data.

  Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes a prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and, for example, a big prize opening 2103A or a big prize opening 2103B (corresponding to at least one big prize opening) The detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110A or the count switch 2110B in accordance with the reception of the game ball at the number of minutes corresponds to the number of the big winning opening 2103A or the big winning opening 2103B (corresponding to at least one big winning opening). For example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball, for example, when written in the corresponding definition bit areas defined one bit at a time. , To the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

  In this embodiment, since the two big winning openings 2103A and 2103B are provided as the big winning openings, the main control program uses a plurality of definition bits prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the above-described definition bit areas. From the area, two definition bits for the special winning openings 2103A and 2103B are used. Hereinafter, these will be referred to as “first bit area” and “second bit area” in this order. For example, in the case of a game board having one winning prize slot, one definition bit area is used. These definition bit areas to be used are, for example, one bit and are adjacent to each other. When the game ball is received at the big winning opening 2103A, for example, “1” is written in the first definition bit area which is the fourth bit, for example, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110A. When a game ball is received in the big winning opening 2103A or the big winning opening 2103B (corresponding to at least one big winning opening), for example, “1” is detected information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110A or 2110B. For example, it is written in the second definition bit area which is the fifth bit. In this way, the main control program accepts the game ball at either the first prize winning opening 2103A or the second prize winning opening 2103B depending on the state of each definition bit area in which the detection information is written. Can be identified. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the big winning opening that has identified that the game ball has been received by writing, for example, “0”, and prepares for the next game ball to be received.

  Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit area is to be checked. For example, the main control program temporarily sets the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110B of the second big prize opening 2103B to the fourth bit and temporarily sets the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110A of the first big prize opening 2103A to 5 bits. If it is an eye, the state of the definition bit area is confirmed as follows. First, when there are two big winning openings as in the present embodiment, the main control program, for example, defines the 6th bit definition bit area-2 bits (2 times) definition bit area = 4th bit Information on the definition bit area of the sixth bit, and information on the definition bit area of the sixth bit-2-1 bit (2-1 times = 1) = definition bit area of the fifth bit.

  On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko machine having only one winning prize opening, the main control program reads the 6th bit definition bit area minus 1 bit (one time) definition bit area = the 5th bit definition bit area. Get information about. As described above, it is desirable to define the definition bit areas continuously.

  Further, the main control program performs a mask process on the detection information acquired in this way in accordance with the winning ball effective range of the special winning openings 2102A and 2102B, which will be described later, to create a winning ball command and store it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not to write and not output to the payout control board 4110. When it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program performs, for example, a mask process for each defined bit area in which detection information based on the detection signals from the count switches 2110A and 2110B is written. The bit may be forcibly set to OFF (“0”) so that the winning ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

  At this time, the main control program, according to the setting of the big winning opening identification flag that sets which big winning opening should be effective in the current jackpot state, the game ball is originally placed in which big winning opening. You can determine whether to accept. That is, the main control program, according to the current setting of the special winning opening identification flag, although the game ball should have been received by the first major winning opening 2103A, If the ball is accepted, it can be determined that there was some misconduct.

  At this time, the main control program determines whether or not the grand prize opening that has received the game ball is the big prize opening on the side that should be opened (referred to as a “genuine big prize opening”), that is, the first special In the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the winning is in the big winning opening 2102A, and in the second special gaming state, it is determined whether or not the winning is in the large winning opening 2102B (authentic winning determination means). Specifically, the main control program shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the first special gaming state in the jackpot gaming state when the established winning condition is the first winning condition (jackpot gaming control means) When the winning flag 2102A is set from “0” to “1”, and the established winning condition is the second winning condition, the gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the big winning gaming state. In addition to the transition to the two special game state (a jackpot game control means), the winning flag 2102B is set from “0” to “1”.

  In this prize ball control process, when the main control program is in the first special gaming state and the winning flag 2102A has a winning flag “1”, that is, one gaming ball has been received in the big prize opening 2103A. The fact that the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110A indicating that this is written in the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103A is, for example, that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball As a prize ball instruction, a prize ball command is created and written in the transmission information storage area described above. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 to control the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the speaker. The sound “Pokon” is output.

  On the other hand, in the first special gaming state, the main control program counts that one winning ball is received in the big winning opening 2103A when the winning flag of the big winning opening 2102A is “0”. Since the detection information based on the detection signal from the switch 2110A is not written in the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103A, for example, a prize ball as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball Do not create commands. Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but forcibly sets the payout execution flag of the big winning opening 2102A to “0”. As a result, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means) so that the game ball payout operation is not executed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103A, clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110A, and then sets the payout execution flag of the special winning opening 2102A to “ The game ball is allowed to be paid out by resetting it to “1”.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out more than the specified number of game balls that can be paid out in accordance with the acceptance of the game ball to the genuine big winning opening 2103A, makes an excessive payout abnormality command (shown in FIG. 36). (Omitted) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step SS92), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a is controlled to cause the speaker to perform predetermined notification. At the same time, the main control program provides a specified payout that can be paid out in accordance with the acceptance of a game ball to the winning prize opening 2103B in the vicinity of the opening / closing member that should not have been opened / closed originally (referred to as “non-authentic big winning prize opening”). When more than several game balls are paid out, an excessive winning abnormality command (not shown in FIG. 36) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then in the command transmission process (step SS92) to the peripheral control board 4140. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is controlled to cause the speaker to perform predetermined notification.

  In this way, since a substantially illegal game ball is not paid out, it is possible to minimize damage to the game hall.

  On the other hand, when the main control program is in the second special gaming state and the winning flag 2102B has a winning flag “1”, that is, the count switch indicates that one gaming ball has been received in the big winning port 2103B. When the detection information based on the detection signal from 2110B is written in the definition bit area corresponding to this special winning opening 2103B, for example, a prize ball command is given as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as a prize ball. Is written in the transmission information storage area described above. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 to control the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the speaker. The sound “Pokon” is output.

  On the other hand, in the second special gaming state, the main control program counts that one winning ball is received in the big winning opening 2103B when the winning flag of the big winning opening 2102B is “0”. Since the detection information based on the detection signal from the switch 2110A is not written in the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103B, for example, a prize ball as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out. Do not create commands. Also in this case, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but forcibly sets the payout execution flag of the big winning opening 2102B to “0”. As a result, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means) so that the game ball payout operation is not executed. Thereafter, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the special winning opening 2103B, clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110B, and then sets the payout execution flag of the special winning opening 2102B to “ By re-setting to “1”, the game ball is allowed to be paid out.

  At this time, the main control program, when paying out more than the specified number of payouts that can be paid out in accordance with the acceptance of the game balls to the genuine big prize opening 2103B, makes an excessive payout abnormality command (shown in FIG. 36). (Omitted) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step SS92), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a is controlled to cause the speaker to perform predetermined notification. At the same time, the main control program provides a specified payout that can be paid out in accordance with the acceptance of a game ball to the big winning opening (referred to as “non-genuine big winning opening”) 2103A in the vicinity of the opening / closing member that should not have been opened / closed originally. When more than several game balls are paid out, an excessive winning abnormality command (not shown in FIG. 36) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then in the command transmission process (step SS92) to the peripheral control board 4140. Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is controlled to cause the speaker to perform predetermined notification.

  If it does in this way, it will become impossible to pay out a substantially illegal game ball like the above, and it can control that a game hall suffers damage.

  On the other hand, instead of the main control program, when it is detected that a game ball is received at the unauthentic large winning opening 2103A, the main control program immediately writes an excessive winning abnormality command in the transmission information storage area, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a. You may make it make a speaker alert | report by control of. Instead of or in addition to the main control program, there is a total of three winning prizes in any one of the plurality of big winning holes 2102A and 2102B when not shifting to the big hit state. Then, a winning abnormality display command (see FIG. 36) may be written in the transmission information storage area so that the speaker is notified by the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  Thereafter, when the payout execution flag is “1”, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means), while executing payout. When the flag is “0”, the prize ball command is not read from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmission to the payout control board 4110 is restricted (prize ball command control means).

  In this way, when game balls are physically received for each of the special winning openings 2103A and 2103B, it can be confirmed by hearing whether or not the corresponding count switches 2110A and 211B are functioning.

  On the other hand, if the payer ACK signal notifying the payout control board 4110 that the payout control board 4110 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control program determines whether the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program executes various commands of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the status display shown in FIG. 37 (for example, frame status 1 command, error canceling navigation command, and frame status 2 command). Send. On the other hand, as described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 860a. In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives the various commands as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 4110 to that effect is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Also, the main control program reformats the command received normally as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified as status display in FIG. 36 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command))) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S82, the main control program performs a fraud detection process (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal is input from the count switch 2100A or the count switch 2100B when the game is not in the big hit game state (the game ball in the big prize opening 2103A or the big prize opening 2103B) Etc.), the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command which is classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 36 as an abnormal state, and stores it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. To do.

  In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is set, one of the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B that is opened / closed in accordance with the transition to the jackpot gaming state is disposed in the vicinity of one of the opening / closing members (illustrating the opening / closing member 2106A). When a detection signal is input from the count switch 2100B corresponding to a large winning opening other than the large winning opening 2103A (here, the other large winning opening 2103B is illustrated) (a game ball enters the large winning opening 2103B) In this case, the main control program creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 36 as an abnormal state, and stores it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the above-described jackpot determination random number by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102. That is, triggered by a winning award (establishment of the start condition), the value of the above-mentioned counter is taken out for each start storage information for which the start condition is satisfied, and used as a big hit random number value. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also expressed as “special lottery”. The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are met) ), The normal gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state. The jackpot game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, which will be described later, and indicates a game state in which these are collectively called.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, the game balls launched into the game area flow down between a number of nails provided in the game area, and some of them enter the start opening or the general start opening. In the big hit gaming state, many of them enter the big prize opening according to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member covering the big prize opening. As described above, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening or the big winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out according to the received number (see the above reference). By the way, recent gaming machines are provided with a plurality of large winning holes in the game area of the game board, and one of the opening and closing members arranged in the vicinity of each large winning hole is opened and closed. However, there are some types of pachinko machines that have different numbers of big prize mouths, so different control program codes are required and development efficiency is not good. There was a problem.

  Therefore, the main control program is determined in advance when the opening / closing control program code that is a part of the program code is executed and, for example, the game is shifted to the jackpot gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as “special gaming state”). By controlling the opening / closing operation of any one of the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B (corresponding to “at least one opening / closing member”) (herein, “opening / closing member 2106A” is illustrated) according to the opened / closed pattern. Then, a mode in which the game ball is easily received and a mode in which it is difficult to receive the game ball are repeated in the special winning opening 2102A (corresponding to “at least one special winning opening”) arranged in the vicinity of the opening / closing member 2106A.

  At this time, the main control program uses, for example, the number of rounds, opening time, opening time, and game as data for defining the jackpot gaming mode set in the jackpot gaming mode determination process (see FIG. 69) described later. Definition data area (not shown) which is a partial storage area of the main control built-in RAM specified by an address obtained by offsetting the definition data (table) representing the ball winning limit count number according to the number of the big winning mouths. Read). In the present embodiment, since there are two large winning openings, for example, two definition data areas are formed in the main control built-in RAM. In these definition data areas, “1” is assigned to one definition data area, while “2” is assigned to the other definition data area. In addition, when offsetting the address as described above, the main control program instead of subtracting the identification number of each definition data area every time so as to start from “0” like a general coding method, In the present embodiment, it may be started from “1” from the beginning. In this way, it is not necessary for the main control program to perform subtraction every time, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Subsequently, the main control program sets the number of loops according to the number of the big winning openings 2102A and 2102B by executing the loop processing control code as a part thereof, and according to the number of the big winning openings 2102A and 2102B. The above-described opening / closing control program code and prize ball control program code (or at least one of them) are repeatedly executed over the number of loops.

  In this way, the main control program sets the number of loops to two when there are two big winning holes as in this embodiment, and first accepts the game ball into the first big winning hole 2102A. For the control that affects the above, etc., the opening / closing control program code and the prize ball control program code are executed as the first time, and subsequently, for the control that affects the acceptance of the game ball to the second big prize opening 2102B, etc. After the same opening / closing control program code and prize ball control program code are executed for the second time, the subsequent loop processing is skipped. On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko machine with a single winning opening, the main control program sets the number of loops to 1 for the control that affects the acceptance of game balls to the only winning opening. In addition, after executing the opening / closing control program code and the prize ball control program code as the first time, the execution of the loop processing of the number of times thereafter is skipped. This can be similarly applied to a pachinko machine equipped with three or more prize winning openings.

  As described above, it is possible to share the program code related to the control that affects the reception of the game ball into the big prize opening among a plurality of types of models having different numbers of big prize winning openings. For this reason, not only can the development efficiency be improved when developing a plurality of types of pachinko machines having different numbers of winning prizes, but it is not necessary to code for each model, so that coding errors can also be suppressed. Further, as in the present embodiment, for example, even a pachinko machine 1 provided with a plurality of large winning openings 2103A, 2103B, an opening / closing member 2106A that affects the acceptance of game balls to the plurality of large winning openings 2103A, 2103B. , 2106B, when viewing the program code of the main control program related to the control such as opening / closing operation, it is only necessary to confirm the program code for each of the plurality of large winning openings 2103A, 2103B, so the confirmation work can be simplified. It can be completed in a short time. In addition, for gaming machines with a small number of big winning mouths, it is not necessary to include extra (unused) program code for gaming machines with a larger number of big winning mouths. Since processing can be performed, resources can be spent for other processing, and the program capacity can be reduced.

  By the way, a subroutine, which is a program module constituted by a set of program codes, is generally called after a CALL instruction included in a main routine and a program code group included in the program module is executed. The return instruction is used to return to the main routine (see the above reference). In this case, since an instruction for calling back is required, it seems difficult to reduce the program capacity at first glance.

  However, in this embodiment, when the main routine includes a continuous subroutine, for example, after the main routine calls and executes the first subroutine with the CALL instruction, the next subroutine is called with another CALL instruction continuously. In addition, a return instruction may not be arranged at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine, but may be connected directly to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With the program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

  In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described above, the main control program determines whether or not the random number for jackpot matches the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. The main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the lottery result, and the random number for jackpot matches the probability variation determination value (the probability variation transition condition is satisfied). In this case, the game is shifted to the probability variation state. On the other hand, if the jackpot random number value does not match the probability variation determination value (the condition after probability variation is not satisfied), the game state other than the probability variation is transitioned ( Winning probability control means). Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Further, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program is shown in FIG. 35 when the lottery result mentioned above is triggered by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2101. When the various drawing-related commands related to the special figure 1 are created, and the lottery result is triggered by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, the special figure 2 synchronous shown in FIG. Create various commands related to production. The main control program stores the command thus created in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  At the same time, the main control program determines a start hold display mode by referring to a hold pre-read table (not shown) based on various random number values acquired in response to the start winning, and displays the change after the start winning. Before disclosing the special symbol stop symbol, a command (hereinafter referred to as “reserved ball number change” as an example) is executed to imply a special lottery result (hereinafter referred to as “preceding judgment process”). Command ”), and when the preceding determination process is to be executed, it is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program includes information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game, as will be described later, instead of the random value itself of the special lottery. I am doing so. Details of the preceding determination process will be described later.

  Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal so that the upper special symbol display 1185 is turned on according to the variation display pattern determined at the time of starting winning according to the special symbol type, or the lower special symbol display 1186. Is set to turn on, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. When the main control program shifts to the jackpot gaming state, for example, the various commands classified into the jackpot relationship shown in FIG. 35 (the jackpot opening command, the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, the big winning opening 1 closing) Display command, winning prize 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the opening / closing member 2107 is opened / closed by the attacker solenoid 2108A or the attacker The output of the drive signal to the solenoid 2108B is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2103A or the big prize opening 2103B is changed from the closed state to the opened state is two. Sometimes, 2 of the round indicator 1190 shown in FIG. The lighting signal output to the two-round display lamp 1190a is set so as to turn on the ound display lamp 1190a and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the round is 15 times, the round indicator 1190 displays 15 rounds. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1190b to turn on the lamp 1190b and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or turn on the presence or absence of transition to the probability variation state in a predetermined color The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1183 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Here, in general pachinko machines, when a game ball starts winning prize, a special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner and a big win lottery is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting state of a so-called probability variation lamp as a gaming state indicator is changed and the state changes to a probability variation state. In this probability fluctuation state, the probability of the big hit lottery described above is set to be relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the big win is achieved (references described above). reference). By the way, as a gaming machine that may move to the probability variation state after the probability variation state is finished in this way, the probability variation state is mainly continued until the next big hit, as if the jackpot game loops. The one that behaves as if it is (hereinafter referred to as “loop machine”), and the one that continues the probability variation state after the jackpot game ends until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as “ST (special time)”) Called "machine"). As described above, the pachinko machines with different ways of continuing the probability variation state have different game state display controls as described above, and the game state display control must be designed for each model at the development stage. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is received in the start port 2103A or the start port 2103B, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied. In the case of shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, if the winning condition is satisfied and the probability changing transition condition is further satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is relative to that in the normal gaming state. And the display state of the game state indicator 1183 is turned on. The main control program then sets the display state of the game state indicator 1183 to a specific interrupt cycle when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, and the probability variation state is continued. The display state of the game state indicator 1183 is changed from the light-off state to the light-on state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

  Specifically, as described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is received at the start port 2103A or the start port 2103B ( Lottery means), if the winning condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state, while if the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the winning condition is satisfied. The probability is changed to a probability fluctuation state in which the probability is set to be relatively higher than the normal gaming state (gaming state control means). While this probability control state continues, the main control program keeps the display state of the game state indicator 1183 in the lighting state, while the game state indicator 1183 displays the display state when a transition is made to a game state other than the probability change state. The mode is turned off (lighting mode control means). When the main control program turns on the display state of the game state indicator 1183 in response to the transition to the probability variation state described above, and then the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability change transition condition is further satisfied, After the probability variation state is continued, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 is temporarily changed from the lighting state to the extinguishing state within a specific interrupt cycle, and then the game is performed within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the extinguished state to the lit state again (lit state continuation control means). Although the player wants to visually recognize that the probability variation state continues, the display state of the game state indicator 1183 can be changed for a very short time as described above. It is possible to make it appear as if the display state of the game state display 1183 has not changed on the visual of the player.

  If it does in this way, it will be difficult to visually recognize that it turned off once, and it will be visually recognized as if the lighting state continues on the display mode of game state indicator 1183. Then, even if the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability variation state continues continuously, the probability variation state continues until the specified number of variations after the jackpot gaming state ends. Even if it is a so-called ST (special time) machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified fluctuation number, a program code that controls the display mode of the gaming state indicator 1183 between different models Can be shared. As a result, the development efficiency of different types of pachinko machines can be improved.

  Further, in this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state when the winning condition is satisfied as described above, Further, when the probability variation transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the state is also shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state (gaming state control means). Here, the main control program may be shifted to the probability variation gaming state as an example of the specific gaming state without substantially paying out the game ball in the big hit gaming state. The specific gaming state may be a state in which the time-shortening operation condition is established as another example of the transition condition and the time-shortening function is in operation. It may be in a gaming state. This main control program manages the remaining number of times of the special symbol variable display during a period from a certain gaming state to another gaming state, and transmits gaming state information representing the managed gaming state. By writing it in the transmission information storage area as information, it is then transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (game state notification means).

  Specifically, when the above-described probability change transition condition is satisfied in this main control program, special symbols are variably displayed until the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability change game state, for example, the normal game state. Information related to the remaining number of times (hereinafter referred to as “remaining number of times information”) is included in one of the commands transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, the change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern By writing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, it is then transmitted in the command transmission process S92 described later within the same timer interruption period (remaining fluctuation number notifying means). The main control program may include the remaining number of times information described above in other commands, or may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as an independent command.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the main control program reads input information from the input information storage area described above and performs a gate winning process based on this input information. In this gate winning process, the main control program determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal from the input information. Based on this determination result, the main control program extracts the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal random number for determination per symbol when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, and stores the main control built-in RAM as gate information. Is stored in the gate information storage area.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following such a gate winning process, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and extracts the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol from the read gate information. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as “normal lottery”). The main control program determines whether to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2105 according to the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). When the main control program performs the opening / closing operation by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2105 are in an open state, so that a game ball can be received into the lower start port 2102 and a game state advantageous to the player To migrate. Furthermore, the main control program determines the normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to the above-described determination based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number value, and is classified into the general symbol synchronization effect related shown in FIG. The command is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and a lighting signal is output to the normal symbol display 1189 so that the normal symbol display 1189 is lit in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Is stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, when the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program reads the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. Various related commands are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start-up solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2105, and the output described above as output information. Store in the information storage area. On the other hand, the main control program, when the value of the random number for normal symbol determination taken out does not coincide with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above, and various commands classified as related to the common-synchronization effect shown in FIG. 35 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and the determined normal The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a and outputs various signals based on the output information. The main control program, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. Is output to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B for opening and closing the opening / closing member 2107 of the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B, or the opening and closing operation for the pair of movable pieces 2106 is performed. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the mouth solenoid 2105, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time reduction About games such as medium information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. And outputs various information (game information) signal to the payout control board 4110.

  Subsequent to step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data (command Transmission means). The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interruption process, which is this routine, shown in FIG. Various commands categorized as commands and jackpots (for example, corresponding to a big prize mouth count command based on a detection signal from the count switches 2100A and 2100B when a game ball having entered the big prize holes 2103A and 2103B is detected. 36 winning command 1 count display command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric effect, notification display shown in FIG. Various commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) classified into Min is the various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit) ) Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame release command (first main body frame release command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 A main body frame release command (second main body frame release command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the body frame release command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) from the payout control board 4110 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means, and second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 via the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 37 received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S92, the main control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the main control program switches (restores) the registers (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[13. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a continuation of processing when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 41. FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creation process, and FIG. 46 is a sprocket. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball spot determination process, and FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for a prize ball. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning ball stock number addition process for renting a ball, and FIG. 50 shows an example of the stock monitoring process. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout ball movement determination process. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process. FIG. 53 shows an example of a ball movement setting process. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process, and FIG. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error release operation determination process. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) and input signal confirmation processing (A) from the CR unit at the time of payout operation by ball lending.

  First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interruption processing, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball spot determination processing, award Prize ball stock count addition processing for balls, prize ball stock count addition processing for rental balls, stock monitoring processing, payout ball engagement operation determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball engagement operation setting processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency A counter reset determination process and an error release operation determination process will be described. Ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, prize ball stock number addition processing, ball rental prize ball number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball movement determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes in step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. Rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball corner determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error release operation determination processing, prize ball stock number for prize ball Addition processing, winning ball stock number addition processing for lending, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball engagement operation judgment setting processing Priority in turn has been set.

[13-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 turns on the payout control unit as shown in FIGS. 41 to 43 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Perform time processing. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode in the payout control MPU 4120a (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interruption of the payout control MPU 4120a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A warning signal (paid outage warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 1 is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 860a is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is determined that the RAM clear is not instructed. While it is determined that the 860a is not operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed and the operation switch 860a is operated. judge.

  When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. (Pinning control side power-on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 4120a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area Flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the set status (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Is done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process described later (at the time of power-off). (Step S526). If they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to the value 0 being set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, information at the time of power recovery is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 4120a (hereinafter referred to as “the payout control internal ROM”). This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the payout control program reads the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear process triggered by detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 860a (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control program sets a value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether a power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is sent to the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. From the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) has been input. Determine.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms have elapsed, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control program sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 34) have been normally received, payout motor 744 is provided. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control, prize ball information on the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b, and the like are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or a payout motor 744 outputs a drive signal, and the number of balls that the payout motor 744 actually pays out the game balls (In this embodiment, every time the payout motor 744 actually pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information signal is outputted to the external terminal plate 784). A display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when the determination is made as to whether or not a ball stagnation state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the ball swatch determination set as the determination condition is performed. The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, and when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. 1 is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball break switch 750, the determination condition is as follows. In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time, the number of game balls that are received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751, and Inconsistency set with the determination condition when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the payout of the game ball due to inconsistency is repeatedly performed Time management of counter reset judgment time is performed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball breakage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of subtraction becomes 0. The removal determination time, full tank determination time, ball breakage determination time, and inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit 6 based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above. Determine. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU 4120 a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set on the basis of payout information relating to payout (PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set).

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 and, when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery Etc. are restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (dispensing control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure. It is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals generated by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. The data is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 4120a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. That is, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process For example, when the communication with the CR unit 6 is not in progress, The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  Thereby, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output at the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is impossible. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless lending request signal from the CR unit 6, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. 1 is when the power is turned on, and when the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are connected to a lending device connection terminal such as a game ball. When not electrically connected via 869, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a Is output from the output terminal to the CR unit 6. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 4110 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs a full tank and ball break check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether the game balls are full or the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the award ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball break switch 750. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the game balls stored is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms and the full tank and full ball check processing at this time. The detection signal from 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is turned OFF in the last full (2 ms before) full ball and ball check check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON from OFF. When the transition is made, the time for the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the above-mentioned state information memory stores the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply path of the award ball apparatus 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, When the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is turned ON from OFF. When the transition is made, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON in the full tank and ball break check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is ON, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is OFF, the ball break is transmitted to the effect that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 34) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control program performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, rental balls, ball removal and ball scoring are performed, retry operations are judged, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. To do.

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 4110 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, the corresponding display data (In this embodiment, a display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control program performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (door frame opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame) classified into the status display shown in FIG. The main control board is created by creating an opening command, a body frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), an error canceling navigation command (corresponding to the first error canceling command) and a frame state 2 command) To 4100. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this out-of-ball information, a frame state 1 command is issued. It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. Further, in this command transmission process, this payout control program, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error relating to a game ball payout operation, for example, information relating to the location of the error that has occurred with respect to this payout operation (hereinafter referred to as “the game ball payout operation”). A frame state 1 command (first error canceling command) including “error occurrence position information” is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, if the payout control program indicates that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 860a is detected, the error described above. A cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) is output (command sending means). The payout control program transmits a body frame release command (first body frame release command) when a body frame release detection signal is input from the body frame release switch 619 (a body frame command sending means, a first body frame command sending means; 1 body frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). On the other hand, the payout control program transmits a main body frame close command (first main body frame close command) when a main body frame close detection signal is input from the main body frame open switch 619 (main body frame command sending means, first 1 body frame command sending means). Further, the payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) when a door frame opening detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618 (door frame command sending means; 1 door frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). On the other hand, when a door frame closing detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, 1 door frame command sending means, first specific frame command sending means). In addition, the payout control program reads out error information including error contents from the state information storage area described above in the command transmission process (step S566) described above, and the machine number information for identifying itself from other pachinko machines, and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Upon receiving this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned machine number information and error information to the radio device possessed by the hall clerk, and this hall clerk provides the pachinko machine with the machine number based on this machine number information. It is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control program sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets a value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and whether or not a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540. If this power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is not input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. When 2 ms has elapsed, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548 In step S550, port input processing is performed. In step S552, Immediate update processing is performed, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and out of ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, and main processing is performed in step S562. Operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. . The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Accordingly, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a ensures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal (paid power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control program stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control program performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program performs prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a is reset, and then the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU4120a. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a power-on process of the payout control unit by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[13-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 44 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Then, the register is switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, a value of 1 when 2 ms elapses, and a value of 0 when 2 ms elapses. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[13-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, rotation angle switch history creation processing will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 17 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout control program from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 45 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). A history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S610, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S610, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the payout control program detects the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. It is determined that the shaft is in a state where the shaft has transitioned from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the blocked state to the non-blocked state in step S612, the payout control program performs a rotation process of the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S614). In this rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted into the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0, and so on, and is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7.

  Subsequent to step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a rotation angle switch detection history information shift process (step S618). . In the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process, the payout control program performs the same process as the rotation angle switch detection history information shift process in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, such as B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. Shift one bit at a time.

  Subsequent to step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  Thus, each time this rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the detection slit rotates after the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted bit by bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Depending on the state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 752 has been changed from the non-blocking state to the non-blocking state or the state in which the detection slit has shifted the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, Since the value 0 is set, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[13-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotator is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is completed. Thereby, rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state in which no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute a fixed position determination skip flag SKP− as shown in FIG. 46 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is to be performed, and is 1 when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping). The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program stores the rotation angle switch history information in the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)” in this embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are 0 and the lower 4 Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the above described detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 continuously in four timer interruption cycles. Is a state in which the state is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state. In the occurrence of the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 17 rotates four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since these first gear, second gear, and third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. Since the rotation is designed to be equivalent to about two steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, in this embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation angle switch 752 The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 45, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, This is performed based on a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 when the latest four timer interruption periods occur. As a result, in the four timer interruption cycles, the payout motor 744 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotator due to backlash. Can do. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), and are set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program A value 1 is set to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). Thereby, it can set so that the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is not performed (skip). The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Subsequent to step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to be valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed equally (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection board. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotary body) is designed to correspond to the 18-step rotation of the dispensing motor 744.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Specifically, (1) a transition state in which the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state (referred to as an “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit has a rotation angle. A state in which the optical axis of the switch 752 has transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position determined state”), and (3) a detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a non-blocked state to a blocked state. And three states (the “fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to four step rotation of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 744, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), the detection slit is in a state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, and therefore the skip determination time is the time for which the payout motor 744 rotates 13 steps. Is set. As described above, since the timer interruption period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, sets the initial value 0 to the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632 is performed. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step 4 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. . The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply path of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. For this reason, the prize ball device 740 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball apparatus 740 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) for connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case 740 in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. Cheap.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. Thereby, the precision of the fixed position determination of the paying-out rotating body is increased. Since the period and period necessary for detecting the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be obtained by calculation in advance as described above, the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[13-5. Spherical spot detection processing]
Next, the sphere collision determination process will be described. In this ball collision determination process, it is determined whether or not a ball collision state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted.

  When the ball collision determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 performs a rotation angle from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Subsequent to step S640, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S642). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program This routine is finished as it is, assuming that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and no ball-spinning state has occurred. To do.

  On the other hand, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S642, a sphere is seen. A value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-spinning state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When the payout motor 744 performs a ball-spinning operation, the value 1 is set. When no operation is performed, the value is set to 0.

  Subsequent to step S644, the payout control program sets the ball collision determination time to be valid (step S646), and ends this routine. As the ball stagnation determination time becomes valid, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. .

[13-6. Various prize ball stock addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processing will be described. The prize ball stock number addition process includes a prize ball prize ball number addition process and a rental ball prize ball number addition process. The prize ball stock number addition process is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later. The prize ball stock number adding process for lending is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be performed preferentially, and according to the number of prize balls stock added in this prize ball stock number addition process. After the game ball is paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set so that the number of prize ball stock for lending is added.

[13-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the award ball stock number addition process for the award ball is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout control program under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is made based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program receives the prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

  Subsequent to step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). This award ball stock PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in this embodiment has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from 0 to 32767. The prize ball stock PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is erased from the received command information storage area.

[13-6-2. Addition of prize ball stock for rental balls]
Next, the processing for adding the number of winning ball stocks will be described. When the lending prize ball stock number addition process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 executes a payout request as shown in FIG. 49 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is made based on the lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the lending request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a lending request signal.

  When there is no lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when there is a lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program reads the award ball information in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The winning ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the rented ball number RBV is added to the winning ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is finished. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. In addition, after adding in step S664, the payout control program deletes the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in this embodiment, the winning ball is prioritized (the winning ball and the lending are managed separately), so even if there is a lending request signal, the lending request signal is held. When a prize ball is paid out, a rental ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of the rented ball is performed after the prize ball stock PBS reaches the value 0.

[13-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues playing the game in a state where the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is processing to.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to display the award ball information in the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 50 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the careful threshold value TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than or equal to the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S674), and the routine is terminated. The caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player starts stocking game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of game balls not paid out (the number of prize balls described above) exceeds the caution threshold TH. This flag indicates that the value has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when the threshold value exceeds the caution threshold TH, and to a value of 0 when the threshold value does not exceed the caution threshold TH.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the caution flag CA-FLG (step S676), and this routine is ended.

  When the game state becomes a big hit, and the player relaxes and looks at the effects unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 shown in FIG. During one round, the game ball paid out as a prize ball may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with game balls, and the game balls are accumulated in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540. When the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the award ball stock PBS increases to exceed the caution threshold TH, and is provided in the door frame 5 as a caution effect. A plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform a hall clerk of paying attention to the player's game. As a result, the hall clerk can tell the player that he / she wants to remove the game ball from the lower plate 302, and the player fills the lower plate 302 (the storage space of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball full. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the careful threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the hall clerk that the player should be alerted to the game as early as possible.

[13-8. Dispensing ball edge motion determination setting process]
Next, the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process will be described. This paying ball sliding motion determination setting processing is performed by paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. This is a process for setting whether or not to discharge or not.

  When the payout ball engagement operation determination setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 has the payout control program built in the payout control described above as shown in FIG. 51 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

  Subsequent to step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 17 (step S682). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S682, when the payout control program matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0.

  If it is determined in step S682 that the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not operating abnormally, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball colliding flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. Is determined (step S686). This in-between-ball flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a ball-bending state has occurred due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. A value of 1 is set when the motion is being performed, and a value of 0 is set when the sphere motion is not being performed.

  When the ball-picking flag PEB-FLG is not the value 1 (value 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-pushing operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the award ball information stored in the above-described payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744.

  When the winning ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full. Is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check process of step S556 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area to determine whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls.

  When the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in step S692, the payout control program performs payout setting processing (to be described later) (step S694), and this routine is ended. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped when the storage space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, when the winning ball stock number PBS is not greater than 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid ball number, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, when the ball bending flag PBE-FLG is 1 in step S686, that is, when the ball bending operation is being performed, the payout control program performs a ball bending operation setting process described later (step S700). Exit. In this ball-spinning operation setting process, a ball-spinning operation that cancels the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 1 in step S684, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally performed, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present (CR unit 6). The logic of the PRDY signal from LOW, that is, held down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information And stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. In some cases (when the EXS signal is held up), the logic HI is maintained.

[13-8-1. Withdrawal setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 is driven to make a setting for paying out game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to set the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 52 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Read (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the payout control program stops outputting (stopping) the drive signal to the payout motor 744. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  Subsequent to step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads the real ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is obtained by counting the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. This count will be described later in detail, but in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 43, the count switch 751 shown in FIG. This is performed based on the detection signal. The real ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the real ball count PB is read from this prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the real ball count PB is set to 0 (step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the real ball count PB are 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set as the drive command number DRV as it is.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, the payout control program sets an output of a drive signal to the payout motor 744. (Step S724). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether there is a detection signal from the count switch 751 (step S728). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the payout control program adds 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and this routine is finished. In step S730, the real ball count PB is incremented by incrementing the real ball count PB.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, If the ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 was transmitted. to decide. Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the real ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out one ball that should be paid out again. Thereby, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the winning ball stock number PBS, a retry operation of paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, the possibility of unpaid game balls to the player can be extremely reduced, and a player's disadvantage due to unpaid game balls can be prevented.

[13-8-2. Spherical motion setting process]
Next, the spherical cornering operation setting process will be described. This ball-spinning operation setting process is a process for performing a setting to cancel the ball-spinning state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted.

  When the ball staking operation setting process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to pass the ball scouring determination time as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is made based on the ball detection time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball collision determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the ball stagnation determination time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S750 that the ball collision determination time has not elapsed, the payout control program reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S752). .

  Subsequent to step S752, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are the same. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set so as to perform the ball collapsing operation (step S756), and this routine is finished. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S758). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value of 0 to the in-ball flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-bending operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball-spinning flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-spinning state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When no operation is being performed (end of the ball collapsing operation), the value is set to 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball collision determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S762, the payout control program sets an error state output to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible at present, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, The logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of falling is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is transferred from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rises and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. . Note that “maintain the logic state of the EXS signal” means that, as described above, when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of HI is HI (the EXS signal is held high), the logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value “0” to the ball-balling flag PBE-FLG as the ball-balling operation ends (step S766), and the routine is terminated.

[13-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. This retry operation monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not a retry operation for paying out a game ball that should be paid out is performed normally.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute the rotation angle of the above-described payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 54 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S772). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the home position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and in this embodiment, is “00001111B (“ B ”represents a bit)”, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits. Is the value 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). The inconsistency counter INCC includes the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751, The number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotor coincides with the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. The value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 52, and by this retry operation, the number of game balls received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body, and the actual counting switch Whether or not paying out game balls that do not match with the number of balls detected in 751 is repeatedly performed is determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read out in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is made based on the detection signal from the count switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778). .

  Subsequent to step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about 1 / million. In this embodiment, the mismatch threshold INCTH is obtained. As a result, the value 5 is set.

  In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 43, as described above, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control built-in RAM at the time of power recovery. Information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC just before the momentary power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information Can be done. As a result, in the determination in step S780, the game ball payout operation (retry operation) performed by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, a prize ball It is determined that the game ball payout operation by the device 740 is in a normal state, and it can be determined that the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780 even during power recovery. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the game ball payout by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

  If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays “Retry error”. In order to notify that “there is a payout control built-in RAM, retry error information for displaying the number“ 5 ”is set on the error LED indicator 860b, which is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that “the prize ball is in stock”, the payout control program sets the information in the prize ball stock to display the number “9” on the error LED indicator 860b and incorporates the above-described payout control. It is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Subsequent to step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. When the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the external factor occurs. When the operation switch 860a is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, an operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 16 as a RAM clear signal. The main control program described above erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM and controls the RAM clear notification command as shown in FIG. 16 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. 4140. Thereby, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 (step S786), and this routine is terminated. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is operating abnormally. The value is 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally, and the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is not performed). It is set to a value of 0 when operating normally).

  Note that the payout control program shows the retry error information (or information in the prize ball stock) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100 in the command transmission process in step S566, and LED display data creation in step S564 in the process is performed. In the process, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored in the output information storage area as LED display information, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process in step S548 in the process Based on the error LED indicator 860b, To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 860b. In the main control board 4100 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. This peripheral control board 4140 emits a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 in a predetermined color (in this embodiment, red), and outputs a lighting signal on the door frame side. Are output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and a plurality of LEDs are caused to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the store clerk or the like who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 to thereby display the number "" on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that “5” is displayed, it can be confirmed that a “retry error” has occurred. Thereby, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the store clerk of the hall, etc., confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like. Compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified, it can be performed very quickly.

  In addition, it has been described above that it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted by intentionally disabling the counting switch 751. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Since the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a hall clerk or the like rushes to confirm the state of the pachinko machine 1. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the number of game balls that can be obtained by a player who performs an illegal act is the same as the inconsistency threshold INCTH, that is, 5 balls Therefore, the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to an extremely low level.

  Further, as described above, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of an internal factor. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor occurs, for example, that the operation switch 860a is operated to cancel the error. Therefore, even if the operation switch 860a or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal action. Absent.

[13-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 This is a process for determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to execute the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 55 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the mismatch counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the mismatch counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area to determine whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  When the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the mismatch counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, an initial value of 7000 s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above (step S794). Exit. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 751 and the number of game balls received and received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls, and the number of game balls received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body is usually equal to the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. As a result, the value is 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 52 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, so that the ball of the game ball that is received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body by this retry operation. The inconsistency counter INCC determines whether or not the game balls that are not consistent due to the discrepancy between the number and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 are repeatedly paid. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one game ball that does not fit due to the retry operation is paid out is about one millionth.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the game board 4 and a frame body such as the main body frame 3 to which the game board 4 is mounted, and the game is performed by exchanging the game board 4 (replacement of a new stand). Since the specification can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740, the power supply board 851 for generating the driving power supply for the prize ball device 740 and the control power supply for the payout control board 4110 have the same function. It is equipped on the frame side. In the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110, the payout control program monitors the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed. The payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 43 stores an inconsistency counter INCC immediately before shutting off when the power is turned off. In the process of step S530 in the power-on process of the payout control unit shown in 42 (setting of the RAM work area when power is restored), the process is started again from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

  Then, when the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and replaced with another game board 4 ′ having a different game specification from the game board 4, the payout control board is turned on. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 to which the game board 4 ′ is attached, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko machine 1 to which the game board 4 before replacement is attached is inherited as it is. For this reason, when a player plays the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 4 'mounted, the number of game balls that do not match is generated at a probability of 1 / million, and the inconsistency counter INCC is generated. When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above, it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation by the payout control MPU 4120a in a short period after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′. There is a fear. That is, in a short period of time after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′, a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. In spite of this, there is a possibility that it is suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation.

  As described above, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the impression that the replaced game board 4 ′ is new and easily breaks down. May be given to players. The probability of one millionth of a game ball being paid out due to a retry operation is one millionth of the time when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and operated continuously for one week during the hall's business hours. Since it is the same as the probability of one game ball being paid out due to the retry operation, in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. The value 1 is not subtracted. Then, the value 1 is incremented to the mismatch counter INCC in one week and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 1, and the value 1 is further incremented in the mismatch counter INCC and the mismatch counter INCC becomes the value 2 in 2 weeks. In week, value 1 is further incremented in inconsistency counter INCC, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 3, in value 4 in inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented, value in inconsistency counter INCC becomes value 4, and in week 5 The value 1 is further incremented in the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the inconsistency threshold INCTH described above. That is, when 5 weeks have elapsed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program performs the control in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 54 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751, and a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, and the like occur. 54 is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110 in order to notify that it is a “retry error” in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Retryer to display number “5” on error LED indicator 860b Set the information so that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination of step S790 in the inconsistency counter reset determination processing, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the inconsistency counter INCC to 0, that is, forcibly resetting the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, the inconsistency counter INCC that is generated with the probability of 1 / million million is increased. Invalidated. As a result, there is an error in the retry operation even though the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, the contact failure of various connectors, and the like have not occurred. Can be prevented from being set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Note that the game ball that is received by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted by deliberately disabling the counting switch 751 is difficult to detect. In the case where the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short time even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by the retry operation is performed, As described above, when the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that the hall clerk confirms the state of the pachinko machine 1. To rush to do. If it does so, the player who performs a fraudulent act will have to be interrupted so that the act may not be discovered, and the illegal game ball by a fraudulent act cannot be continuously acquired. On the other hand, when the count switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactivated for a long time so that the value of the mismatch counter INCC does not become equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the mismatch counter INCC is set every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs fraudulent action is that the inconsistency counter INCC is up to the inconsistency threshold INCTH and the count switch 751 is intentionally set as described above. Even if the player is repeatedly inactivated for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who performs an illegal act can be extremely reduced.

[13-11. Error release operation determination process]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 17 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the payout control program to release the error of the operation switch 860a as shown in FIG. 56 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not it has been operated (step S800). This determination is made based on the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control part power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area, and determines that the error cancellation is not instructed when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. When the operation switch 860a is determined not to be operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the error cancellation is instructed, and the operation switch 860a is operated. It is determined that

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs error flag state confirmation processing. This is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various types of error information regarding the prize ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is operating abnormally and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not operating abnormally (retry operation is operating normally), respectively. Since the payout control program is set, the payout control program checks whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this status information setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the status information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (status information) is read from the status information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Based on the information, a status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, it indicates that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control part main process) shown in FIG. A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits the main control program to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the control board 4140, the sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process for reporting that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation “Check the prize ball unit.” And “Check the payout control board harness.” 2 times) By repeatedly flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is supposed to be. A store clerk or the like who heard this retry operation error notification announces the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. Compared to the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, it can be confirmed very quickly. In the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment).

  Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs release setting processing (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, when the error flag state indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various types of error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopped or the ball can be lent out by the error LED indicator 860b which is a segment indicator already mounted on the payout control board 4110. In this case, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the state where the PRDY signal is raised, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball is connected from the output terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. Or output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed. The retry error information stored in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is “normal” in order to forcibly stop the number “5” for informing that the “retry error” is present. This is forcibly overwritten on the information on which the graphic “-” for informing the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be lent out, the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Output to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  Subsequent to step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the error flag status indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is operating abnormally is 1, that is, when the retry operation is operating abnormally, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is maintained, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thus, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control part main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. .

  As described above, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is determined in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 54 and the value of the mismatch counter INCC is equal to or greater than the mismatch threshold INCTH, this internal factor is determined. In response to the occurrence of the error, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process. On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, this causes an external factor. When this occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 0 and initialized. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM when the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on. Similar to the case where the switch 860a is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the main process on the main control side is executed on the operation switch 860a (operation switch) that should have been originally used to cancel the error that has occurred regarding the payout operation. Instead of this, an operation unit for exhibiting a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game memory unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout memory unit) It is functioning as. Further, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 860a to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the game ball payout operation after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is not familiar with the operation of the pachinko machine, as long as he remembers the position of the operation switch 860a on the back of the gaming machine, If a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the function of canceling the error that occurred in relation to the game ball payout operation is exhibited, while the predetermined time from the time the power is turned on according to the timing of operating the operation switch 860a. If it is within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exhibited. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can take appropriate action without hesitating the switch operation by improving the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of handling the error, so that the game is interrupted. The game can be resumed before the played player loses his willingness to play.

[13-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process of FIG. 43 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and subsequently input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount is performed twice) is used as the number of rented balls. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read out from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and stored in the read input information. Confirms the logical state of the BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms that is the interrupt timer period.

[13-12-1. Signal processing during payout by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out a rental ball. If the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation is possible is set, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible. In order to transmit the signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control unit MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120. It outputs to CR unit 6 via board 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player pushes the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, the ball rental switch 365b is switched on (turned on). The operation signal is input as a TDS shown in FIG. 18 from the frequency display board 365 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). . This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input has a payout control program from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms. A predetermined number of balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls) in one payout operation from the CR unit 6 through the gaming device lending device connection terminal plate 869 until the time elapses. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as a monetary amount) is monitored whether or not a BRQ which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out the money rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls, FIG. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, and the signal is Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a, when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, from the timing H2 to the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in this embodiment, Is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms), the payout control MPU 4120a holds the logic of the EXS signal HI, that is, keeps the raised state, in order to notify that one payout operation has started. Is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port and output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball (timing H3).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input has a lending instruction monitoring time HC (in this embodiment, set to 20 ms to 58 ms) from the timing H3. The BRQ that has been started up and held from timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 57C, the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation until the payout monitoring time HD (in this embodiment, the ball payout time is set) from the timing H4. Then, only the predetermined number of rented balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. When the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while keeping its logic at LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

  The CR unit 6 pays out the remaining number of game balls of 100 yen out of the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls. ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball until the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from the timing H5. 869 is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a), and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen of the number of game balls to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 as shown in FIG. 57 (c) using the method described above. The EXS signal that has been raised and held is set to the logic level LOW, that is, held in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. It outputs to CR unit 6 via the board 869 (timing H7).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the CR unit 6 starts from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in this embodiment, the maximum 268 ms) is elapsed from the timing H7. The raised BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The lending request monitoring time HA, the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, the lending instruction monitoring time HC, the dispensing monitoring time HD, the next request confirmation timing HE, and the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF described above are the dispensing control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer update process in step S552 in the power-on process (payout control part main process).

  The payout control MPU 4120a does not communicate with the CR unit 6 when a ball breakage, ball rounding, counting switch error, retry error, full tank, etc. occurs (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6). Is held LOW, that is, held down, as shown in FIG. 57 (d), the PRDY signal raised and held from timing H1 is set to the logic LOW, that is, the state is lowered, as shown in FIG. It is held and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, rising and being held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined | prescribed output port of control MPU4120a, and outputs to CR unit 6 via the lending apparatus connection terminal board 869, such as game balls, as EXS. “Keep the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic of the EXS signal is HI. The logical HI is maintained when the EXS signal is held up.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money as 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls having the number of lent out balls of 50 are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A hall clerk or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used for the upper plate 301 or When set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as a monetary amount, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as a monetary number When set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls of 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and sets the number of game balls of 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of rented balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[13-12-2. Checking input signal from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 allows the CR unit 6 to send BRQ via the CR unit 6 via the lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball even when the lending demand monitoring time HA has passed. When the signal is not started up or when the above-described lending instruction monitoring time HC elapses, the CR unit 6 connects BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869, even when the signal has not fallen or when the next request confirmation timing HE described above has elapsed. A ball or other lending device connection terminal board 869 is used to output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not started up, or as described above. Even after the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 4110 from the CR unit 6 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered. If not, the above-described PRDY and EXS are used to check whether BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0) as shown in FIGS. 57 (e) and 57 (f), a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment) from this timing J0. , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 Then, PRDY is output to the CR unit 6 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being lowered is held and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a Is output to the CR unit 6 through the rental device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball. To force (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J1 after the elapse of a predetermined period JB (in this embodiment, 200 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J1 as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2 ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of a predetermined period JC from the timing J2 (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3). ).

  Subsequently, after the elapse of a predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down from the timing J3 as HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal raised and held from the timing J4 after the elapse of a predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4 as its logic LOW. In other words, it is held in a lowered state, outputted from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputted as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5). ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held down and held from the timing J5 after the elapse of a predetermined period JF from the timing J5 (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) as the logic HI. In other words, it is held in the raised state, output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6). ).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[14. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receive various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 60 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

[14-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
[14-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. Thus, various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20, effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the contents backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc are compared. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content that is backed up at the same time, is compared, and the production backup information (the content that is backed up in Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms)) ( ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The production backup information (1fr) and the production backup information (1ms) stored in Bank1 (1ms) with respect to Bank0 (1ms) are copied back to make a hot start, When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral backup SRAM 4150d also compares the production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in the Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the production backup information (SRAM), which is the contents backed up in the Bank 3 (SRAM) and the Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the production backup information (SRAM) that is the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to the Bank0 (SRAM) that is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 20). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is relative to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. 0 is forcibly written and a cold start is made. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-management target work area 4150cf in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 20) to clear it to zero. Then, after performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e (see FIG. 19) so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying the hour, minute, second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 4, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. In the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the game board is set to have the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of turning on the backlight by adjusting the luminance of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Is turned on by adjusting the backlight brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information. Lights with the brightness adjusted. In this liquid crystal display device luminance setting process, the same correction as the above-described luminance correction program for correcting the luminance of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device incorporates a correction program similar to the brightness correction program, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, which will be described later, is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. It is made so that it won't be applied.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp driving board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the game board 4 is stored in the lamp drive board transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set in a lamp data creation process to be described later It has become.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored at the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. The data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the lamp drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the lamp drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmit serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring and writing to the buffer register, the lamp drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also here, the frame I / O port LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In 4150cab, door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Is set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first one byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the head address of 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use a bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is stored byte by byte in the external bus 4150h and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. And frame decoration via peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial amplifier I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED writes the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. Transfer and start transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and perform continuous transmission by the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Yes.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs an operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (rotation direction) ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Monitor the presence or absence of operation of the unit 405, Appropriately determined whether to reflect the state of operation of the pressure operation unit 405 to the game effects.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the display data creation processing described later is sent from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. The data is output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In the display data output process, when the drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used as the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal. The output to the display device 470 is canceled. Thereby, although delay of processing time can be prevented, so-called frame dropping occurs, a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 by the ramp data output processing in step S1012, and The speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 by the effect by the plurality of LEDs on the various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later, and shown in FIG. It is a mechanism in which priority can be given to synchronization with effects produced by music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as audio data obtained by serializing sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation process described later, In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of notification sound and notification sound is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data using the right audio data as a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, in addition to the stereo reproduction of music, sound effects and the like adapted to various effects from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the notification sound and the notification sound Is also played in stereo.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, what number screen data from the top screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to output.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the number of the light emission data from the first light emission data is emitted from the various LEDs. The pointer is updated to indicate whether the mode is set.

  In the scheduler update processing, sound data such as music and sound effects, sound data of notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate what number of sound command data from the head sound command data is to be output to the built-in sound source VDP 4160a.

  In the scheduler update process, the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used from the head drive data. The pointer is updated to indicate what number of drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in various commands received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analysis). means). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start opening start effect, the number of normal symbols held (0 to 4) ) A normal symbol memory command for identifying the symbol), a symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of the symbol tuning effect, a symbol memory command that is output when the number of start suspension changes, and a game ball is placed in the big prize opening 2103A, 2103B A winning prize 1 count display command output every time it is accepted (big winning prize count command), or a frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command, full error occurrence) indicating the content of full as shown in FIG. (Command analysis means) to recognize which gaming state is currently in progress. In addition, after the predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the effect control program is configured such that the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is a body frame opening command, a body frame closing command, a door frame opening command, or a door frame. Analyzes whether or not the command is a close command. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands shown in FIG. 35 are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands classified as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric character effect, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 36, door frame opening command described above , Door frame closing command, body frame opening command and body frame closing command, error release navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command) and frame state 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command) There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to the test, and various commands that are classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification are stored in the peripheral control unit 4150. The data is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the transition to other abnormality notifications remaining after the abnormality is resolved automatically It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. In the case of various commands to be executed, for example, an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a manner different from the normal rendering mode accompanying the rendering operation, for example, a game A panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900 (effect device), an upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (effect device), and a lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers 130 (effect device) are used. To audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 in spite of being in a gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs main prize ball number information acquisition processing (step S1025), and then performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program stores the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stores it in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The updated calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 based on the light emission data to be performed The peripheral control ROM 4150b of the unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are extracted and created, set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 5 of various decorative boards provided in The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the ED is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is created and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the upper side liquid crystal display device 470 are generated on the built-in VRAM.

  By the way, as described above, as a detection device that can be mounted on a pachinko machine, in general, sensitivity adjustment is generally performed as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then the device operates with the sensitivity (see the above reference). Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process as described above, depending on the gaming environment thereafter, it may be considered that the sensitivity gradually becomes inappropriate at first glance.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation processing, the display control in a mode in which the effect control program further prompts the second display means to contact the operation surface of the contact type input means under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The threshold value for enabling the touch panel module 480a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 480 (contact sensitivity adjusting means) A setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) is output (command output means). In other words, the effect control program prompts the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (second display means) to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 480 (contact type input means) with a finger as an effect command (effect execution command). A command for executing a display operation of a screen of a mode (a mode for prompting contact with the operation surface of the contact type input unit) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command unit) ). Next, in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, when the command is received, the effect control program (the display control program by the control thereof) is touched with the finger on the operation surface of the touch panel 480 (contact type input means) based on the command. A screen in a mode for prompting touching is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the production control program mainly detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 480 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 480a of the touch panel 480 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. (Contact state detection means). That is, this effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) that detects a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 480. The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 480 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by the coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), Operation information including the initial position is acquired. Note that this effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also a range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as a contact range).

  In this touch panel process, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concerns, the presentation control program is controlled by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, separately from the above-described presentation command (production execution command), and thereafter, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 480a (contact input control means) shown in FIG. (Sensitivity adjustment command means).

  Specifically, the effect control program, as the predetermined timing described above, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) has elapsed from the main control MPU 4100a (see FIG. 35) ) When the predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last time, or when the variation time of special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed, 35), the threshold setting command described above is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 480a.

  The effect control program controls the touch panel module 480a, and the touch panel 480 is touched when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a as an example of the outside. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. In other words, the effect control program receives the threshold setting command from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 480a, and based on the threshold setting command, the touch determination stored in the control register 481a. The contact sensitivity by the touch panel 480 is adjusted by updating the threshold value for use. Specifically, when touch panel controller 481 receives this threshold setting command, touch panel controller 481 acquires a capacitance based on a detection signal output from touch panel sensor 482, and uses this capacitance as a contact surface of touch panel 480. Is determined as a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

  After that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new threshold value for contact determination updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired every time the contact state is detected as described above. When it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, the contact surface is determined to be in a non-contact state, while when it is determined that the detected capacitance is equal to or greater than the contact determination threshold. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

  As described above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs contact detection information including the detection coordinate value on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. In the peripheral control board 4140, when the contact detection information is received, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate value included in the received contact detection information.

  As described above, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 480 is increased at a desired timing triggered by the touch panel controller 481 receiving the threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the predetermined threshold value for contact determination is updated, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 480 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing if the output timing of the threshold setting command by the peripheral control MPU 4140a is appropriately controlled. (Calibration) For this reason, the production control program causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold value setting command by removing the output timing that may affect the game by the player, so that the game always has no effect on the touch panel 480. The detection of a contact state can be made into an appropriate operation mode.

  The timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is, for example, as shown above. There is a possibility that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command has been received, and the player has touched the operation surface of the touch panel 480 because the game has been stopped. Low timing can be illustrated. In other words, such contact sensitivity adjustment is performed as much as possible during the special symbol variation display that may be performed using the touch panel 480, and is performed when the variation display ends. Yes.

  In addition, as a timing at which the threshold setting command is to be output, the effect control program receives from the main control MPU 4100a a normal-synchronization effect end command (see FIG. 35) transmitted when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. It may be a timing at which a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has passed.

  On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 480 is of a capacitance type and can be stored in a large number of game balls and is provided on the upper plate 301 where static electricity is likely to be generated. Sensitivity adjustment is performed at a predetermined timing accordingly, and it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such changes in the surrounding environment and not by the player's operation. It becomes difficult to do.

  Subsequent to step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the sound volume is set to the substrate volume 0, the maximum volume is set to the substrate volume 6, and the substrate volume 0 to the substrate volume are set. Each volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, audio data is obtained as audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160 c, music and sound effects flow from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. For example, even when a store clerk or the like of the hall rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the hall and the door frame 5 are accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker 130 is reduced, when the malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, the sound volume is maximum (in this embodiment, the maximum The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be rendered more powerful or advantageous to the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be entered.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc shown in FIG. The contents are copied and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 20, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Included in Bank 0 (1fr), lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The production information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as production backup information (1fr), and Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr) The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is designated as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac, the copy to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (1fr) is used as Bank0 The contents stored at the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150cc to Bank3 (1fr), and Bank0 (1fr) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the first address of Bank3 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies that the backup second area 4150cc is copied to Bank4 (1fr). Shi From the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc is continuously provided by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything starting from the first address.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target every frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 20, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the bank 1 (SRAM) and the bank 2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db by using the production information (SRAM) stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as production backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in backup first area 4150db, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (SRAM) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db in order of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the copy to the Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db is designated, and the content stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) To the contents stored at the end address of Bank 0 (SRAM) are copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150 db in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in the Bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the backup second area 4150dc to the Bank 3 (SRAM), and the Bank 0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) continuously, the top address of Bank3 (SRAM) in backup second area 4150dc The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. P2 is specified, and the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) start address to the content stored in the bank 0 (SRAM) end address is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in a second backup area 4150dc. Are all copied in order from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the steps S1009 to S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[14-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 can be received is input from the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 built-in sound source VDP 4160a. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady process is executed in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling on the way, the peripheral control unit in FIG. 58 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). In addition to notifying the interrupt processing, the peripheral control portion steady processing is completed by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the peripheral control portion power-on processing (peripheral control portion steady processing) of FIG. This is communicated to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, so that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been executed. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, the progress state of the performance can be reliably matched.

[14-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 58 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 performs the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN as shown in FIG. 60 under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, V The interval at which the blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 1 ms timer interrupt for the 33rd time is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program is directly executed by this routine. Exit. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MP4 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. 20 are arranged in time series. In accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program determines the electrical drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuous transmission starts, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c is stored. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7 based on drive data indicated by a pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. 20 is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame decoration It is set to send a dynamic amplifier board-side motor data storage area 4150Caf. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data. Frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai with the first byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 4150caf Transfer and write to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. The 1-byte data starts to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered every time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O 1 byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus does not use the bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and via peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the decorative drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transmits the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port continuously transmits. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c attached externally Drive to motors and solenoids for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 based on drive data indicated by the pointer among drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting signals is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripherals shown in FIG. Motor of control RAM 4150c Set the dynamic substrate side transmission data storage area 4150Cag. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a designates transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT thus obtained is transmitted to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to register. As a result, the serial I / O port for motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start transmitting byte data bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is triggered by the transmission interrupt request for the motor drive board serial I / O port (in this embodiment, in the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty because the 1-byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is transferred byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Serial I / O port for motor drive board By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK and Synchronously, transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input, thereby history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from the various detection switches. , The movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a dial operation unit) Rotation (rotation direction) history information 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.), and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally shown in FIG. Set to 4150cai. The rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110) and a main prize ball number information output process (S1112), and subsequently performs a backup process (step S1114), and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 20 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc for backup.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the 1 ms timer interrupt process of the peripheral control unit, which is this routine, whenever the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up. The production information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, is used as production backup information (1 ms), and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1) of the backup first area 4150 cb Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in s) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  Briefly describing the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The content stored in Bank0 (1 ms) is designated to be copied to Bank1 (1 ms) in backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored at the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) is changed to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The stored contents are all copied in sequence starting from the first address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa performs peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac is designated to be copied to Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150cb, and the content stored in the first address of Bank 0 (1 ms) is used as Bank 0 The contents stored at the end address of (1 ms) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa designates the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, specifies the copy of the second backup area 4150cc to Bank3 (1 ms), and Bank0 (1 ms) ) To the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) from the content stored at the head address of) in the backup second area 4150 cc of bank 3 (1 ms) The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and specifies the copy to Bank4 (1ms) in the backup second area 4150cc. Shi Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 4150 cc from the content stored at the beginning address of Bank 0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank 0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) Copy everything starting from the first address.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 58, various processes related to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are performed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the built-in sound source VDP 4160a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the first 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[14-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 19 starts the transmission of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data. With this as a trigger, the peripheral control MPU 4150a incorporates main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 1-byte (8-bit) information is taken into the reception buffer at the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger to perform peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value that is calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 61 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within a period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the main I / O port for the main control board incorporated in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The value is 2 when extracted from the reception buffer, and the value is 3 when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the main peripheral serial data 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a file environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral controller 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

  In step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main circumference serial data is received. 20 shows the status assigned as the first byte and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, as shown in FIG. 20, in the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 4150c. (Step S1216), and this routine is terminated. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are: It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When storing the peripheral control MPU 4150a in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is allocated as the received status of the main peripheral serial data as the first byte and the main peripheral serial data as the second byte. Are stored in association with each other, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, it exceeds the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100. Sometimes, or in step S1214, if the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[14-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a signal is input (step S1302). If no power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that 2 macroseconds have not elapsed, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If a signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  If the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are sequentially turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. Thus, by suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The received command is stored in the ring buffer.

  Subsequent to step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, and copy to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb Then, from the contents stored at the head address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr), the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is stored. Are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession to a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core The content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is transferred to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by designating copy , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents up to the specified contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa uses the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. From the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the data are copied sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc successively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). If a power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 20 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 19 so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312, and it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 58 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. The MPU 4150a is not reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are Output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in S1312, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

  According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. The main control board 4100 has an upper start port 2101 or a lower start which is a start area provided in the game area 1100 with a game ball launched by the ball striking device 650 toward the game area 1100 defined in the game board 4. A main control MPU 4100a is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game when it is accepted by the port 2102. The payout control board 4110 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 based on the prize ball commands in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b) which are payout commands from the main control board 4100. The payout control MPU 4120a is implemented.

  The main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a. The main control built-in RAM can store information related to the game even after the power is shut off.

  The payout control MPU 4120a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is shut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 860a shown in FIG. If the operation switch 860a is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on process of FIG. 38 is performed after the power is turned on, the information regarding the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. 24 is output from the main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, and is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 29, a RAM clear function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4120a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information relating to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM; 38, the main control side power-on process in FIG. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed (or the period during which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 41 is performed from when the power is turned on) has passed, the prize ball device 740 An error canceling function for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4120a as the payout control microprocessor without outputting it to the main control MPU 4100a as the game control microprocessor as an error clearing signal for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to It is something that combines.

  As described above, when the operation switch 860a is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 38 is performed from when the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. 24 is output to the main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 41 is performed from the time of power-on. 29, the RAM clear signal for outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the payout control MPU 4120a as the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for erasing the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Function and power-on process of the main control side in FIG. Is operated after the period during which the determination process in step S16 is performed (or the period during which the determination process in step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 41 is performed from when the power is turned on) elapses. An error canceling function for outputting to the payout control MPU 4120a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 29 to the main control MPU4100a which is a game control microprocessor as an error clearing signal for canceling the error which occurred with respect to 740 Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, by an operation with one operation switch 860a. Therefore, a RAM clear function and an error cancel function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[15. Control processing on main control board]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the first and second start opening winning processes shown in FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the change start process shown in FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process illustrated in FIG. 63.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state determination process, which is a process of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG. 63. FIG. 70 is an example of a table used for the jackpot game state determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. Note that the main control program executes timer interrupt processing every 4 ms, for example.

[Special symbol and special electric accessory control processing]
In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program first executes the first and second start opening winning processes (step S6110). In the first and second starting opening winning process, the main control program determines whether or not a gaming ball is detected by the upper starting opening switch 3022 and is received by the first starting opening 2101, or It is determined whether or not a game ball is detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and is received in the second start port 2102.

  Next, the main control program first determines whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S6120), and if this processing flag is 0, executes a change start process (step S6130). Note that the processing flag of 0 indicates that, for example, the start condition is satisfied for the start storage information already stored in the start storage information storage area. In this variation start process, the main control program performs settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol based on the result of whether or not a predetermined winning condition is established as a lottery for winning the jackpot, Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to 1.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S6120, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S6140). When this process flag is 1, the main control program executes a variation pattern setting process (step S6150). In this variation pattern setting process, the first special symbol is defined in which the main control program variably displays the first special symbol (special one symbol) using the upper special symbol indicator 1185 every time the start condition is satisfied. A second special symbol in which a variation pattern of the symbol is selected and set (variation pattern selecting means) or a second special symbol (special two symbol) is variably displayed using the lower special symbol indicator 1186. The fluctuation pattern is selected and set (fluctuation pattern selection means), and then the processing flag is updated to 2. This variation pattern represents the variation time from the start of variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186. .

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S6140, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S6170). If this process flag is 2, the following changing process is executed (step S6180). In the changing process, the main control program monitors the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S6150) with a timer, and triggered by the time-out, the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol. The special symbol variation display using the display 1186 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the main control program determines that the winning condition for the big hit game is established in the big win lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 3. When the main control program determines that the winning condition for the small hit game is established in the big win lottery in the above-described variation start process (step S6130), the process flag is updated to 5. On the other hand, if the main control program determines that none of the winning conditions is satisfied in the jackpot lottery and the winning flag is not won, the processing flag is updated to zero. In this case, the main control program is executed again from the variation start process (step S6130) in the next timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S6170, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S6190). When the process flag is 3, the main control program executes a jackpot game preparation process (step S6200). In this jackpot game preparation process, the main control program operates a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, to determine the mode of the jackpot game, and this determined jackpot game The mode (for example, the number of rounds) is set, the accessory continuous activation device is activated, and the processing flag is updated to 4.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S6190, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 4 (S6210). When the process flag is 4, the following jackpot game process is executed (step S6220). In this jackpot game process, the main control program determines whether one of the rounds, the number of times to open, the release time, and the game ball winning limit number as the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S6607). The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B is controlled, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. Here, the main control program controls at least one of the first special game and the second special game as the set jackpot game, and in the first special game, the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A is performed. In the second special game, the opening / closing operation of the other opening / closing member 2106B is executed and the opening / closing operation of the one opening / closing member 2106A is restricted.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 in step S6210, the main control program determines whether or not the processing flag is 5 (S6230). When the processing flag is 5, the following process when the small hit is established is executed (S6240). In the small hitting establishment process, the main control program sets the number of opening times and the opening time for controlling the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B as a small hitting game mode. After that, the main control program sets one opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B to an open state only once for a very short time, for example, based on the set number of opening times and opening time. Control is performed so as to be closed later, and then the processing flag is updated to 0. In this case, in the next timer interrupt process, the change start process (step S6130) is performed again. The small hit game is not a game with the operation of the condition device like the big hit game, but is a kind of big hit game, for example, one open / close member 2106A or the other open / close member 2106B is opened for only a short time. A game having a mode very similar to the game (so-called short open big hit game).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the main control program executes the small hitting establishment processing S6240 depending on whether or not the processing flag is set to 5 in the special symbol and special electric equipment control processing shown in FIG. Can be selected. That is, if the processing flag is in the range of 0-5, the main control program can be a game including a small hit game, while if the processing flag is in the range of 0-4, it does not include the small hit game. It can be a game. As described above, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process includes the program code for the small hit game that can be executed according to the value of the processing flag as in the small hit establishment process S6240. It is assumed that it is not unused program code. That is, the main control program executes another branch process provided in parallel instead of executing the small hitting establishment process S6240. With such a program structure, it is possible to share a program code even among models having different gaming characteristics whether or not a small hit game is included. For example, different models depending on whether or not a small hit game is included There is no need to develop each program code in between.

  As described above, the main control program selectively executes one of the processes of step S6130, step S6150, step S6180, step S6200, step S6220, and step S6240 according to the state of the processing flag described above, and then The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[First and second starting entry prize processing]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second start-up winning process (step S6110) shown in FIG. The first and second start opening winning process (step S6110) is a process related to the determination as to whether or not a game ball has been received at the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102 and that there has been the reception. On the condition that is determined, includes processing for updating the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

[Entering a game ball into the second starting port]
First, the main control program determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the lower start port switch 2109 (step S6201), and if it is determined that a detection signal is output from the lower start port switch 2109, It is determined that the game ball has been accepted (hereinafter also referred to as “start winning prize”) (the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied), and the following step S6202 is executed. In this step S6202, the main control program obtains various random values for the second special symbol lottery (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) triggered by the start winning.

  In addition, this main control program is combined with the jackpot determination random number and the like in response to the start winning prize, instead of acquiring the jackpot game mode determination random value (for example, the round number determination random value), that is, the big prize opening 2103A. , 2103B in a state where it is not determined, the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the special symbol are determined and the game is advanced. Although the details will be described later, this main control program detects that a game ball has passed through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) after displaying a special symbol stop symbol after a predetermined fluctuation time. In response to this, a random value for determining the jackpot game mode is acquired.

  At the same time, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes a second start hold storage process and a hold history update process which will be described later.

  First, in the second start hold storage process, the main control program acquires start storage information (a jackpot determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random number value, etc. acquired when a game ball is received in the second start port 2102) ) Are stored as a predetermined storage area (RAM), for example, in a second start storage information storage area which is a part of the main control RAM, in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension (step S6203). That is, for the second special symbol, the main control program stores at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied for each special symbol type. The predetermined start number is stored in the second start storage information storage area (start storage information storage means, second start storage information storage means) of the main control RAM in such a manner that the order can be specified. Therefore, the main control program reads the second start memory information even when a new game ball is received in the second start port 2102, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (when the start prize is received). If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the second special symbol can be started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start port winning command indicating that the game ball has been received in the second start port 2102 in the transmission information storage area, and the start port in the command transmission process described above. The winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new second start memory information is stored in the second start memory information storage area (that is, the number of second start memory information of the second special symbol is increased). Then, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination condition is satisfied (preceding condition determination lottery means). As the preceding determination condition, any one or any of the above-mentioned jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number 1 storage area and variation type random number storage area It is possible to exemplify that the random number value stored in the combination is read, and the read random number value matches the pre-read determination value for the second special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter, (This is referred to as “holding pre-draw lottery”).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the second special symbol prefetch determination value, while the read random number value is the second special symbol. If the pre-read determination value does not match, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute a hold prefetch command transmission process described later when the predetermination condition is not satisfied, while the hold prefetch command transmission process is as follows when the predetermination condition is satisfied. Execute.

  In the hold prefetch command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command instructing that the hold prefetch effect should be started for the second special symbol in the transmission information storage area. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command includes, for example, a special symbol 2 type prefetching command, a special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetching command, a special symbol 2 variation type prefetching command, and a special symbol 2 variation sorting table information prefetching command. , Or any one of these or any combination thereof, and includes pre-read information to be described later. The prefetch information includes the symbol type of the second special symbol, the variation pattern number, the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

  This special symbol 2 type prefetch command includes information regarding the symbol type of the second special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a small hit, or a lost symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a loss It is the information which shows either. This special symbol 2 variation pattern prefetch command includes information on the variation pattern number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the second special symbol. This special symbol 2 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes the fluctuation distribution table information of the second special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program that has received the above-described special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command uses the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command, as will be described later, and uses the special symbol 2 storage prefetching effect command described later. Production can be performed.

  In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding”) from this transition point. The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition has been satisfied is suppressed over the “determination suppression range” (predetermined determination suppression means). That is, the main control program stores the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state. By suppressing the writing and setting of the (preceding determination instruction command), it is possible to suppress the transmission of the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command in the command transmission process described above (see FIG. 40). Here, “suppression” indicates not only reducing the frequency but also regulating.

  On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the main control RAM (step S6204). Further, in this pending history update process, the main control program has a start condition corresponding to the at least one start memory information stored in the first or second start memory information storage area in the lower special symbol memory display 1187. In a mode in which the at least one first or second start memory information can be specified over the period until it is established, the upper special symbol memory display 1184 or the lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a hold display mode (for example, lighting, Blinking or extinguishing), and then the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized among the at least one first or second start storage information stored by the first or second start storage information storage means As a result, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the priority start storage information is stopped and the first or second start is started. From 憶 information storage area erasing start memory information to be the first (pending digestion control means).

[Entering a game ball into the first starting port]
On the other hand, if the detection signal is not output from the lower start port switch 2109 in step S6201, or if the value of the second hold number counter is 4 that is the upper limit value in the process of step S202, the main control program Then, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the upper start port switch 3022 (step S6205). When a detection signal is output from the upper start opening switch 3022, the main control program determines that a game ball has been received at the first start opening 2101 (hereinafter also referred to as “start winning prize”) (the first special symbol of the first special symbol). When the start condition is satisfied), the following step S6206 is executed. In this step S6206, the main control program obtains various random values for the first special symbol lottery (such as jackpot determination random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, etc.) triggered by the start winning, and the above-mentioned start storage information storage area The number of first start storage information (corresponding to the various random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area (hereinafter also referred to as “first hold number counter”) is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the first hold number counter is less than 4, the main control program sequentially executes the following first start hold storage process and hold history update process.

  In the first start hold storage process, the main control program uses start memory information (such as a jackpot determination random number value, a jackpot symbol random value, etc.) acquired when a game ball is received in the first start port 2101 as a special For example, a predetermined storage area (RAM) is stored in a first start storage information storage area that is a part of the main control RAM while being associated with the symbol type and the order of holding (step S6207). That is, for the first special symbol, the main control program stores at least one start memory information indicating that the start condition is not yet satisfied for the first special symbol, and the order in which the start condition is satisfied for each special symbol. Are stored in the first start memory information storage area (start memory information storage means, first start memory information storage means) up to a predetermined number. Therefore, the main control program stores all the first start memory information when a new game ball is received by the first start port 2101, that is, when the start condition is satisfied (at the time of start winning). If it is not stored in the storage area, it is assumed that the start condition is immediately satisfied, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  At the same time, the main control program writes and sets a start opening prize command indicating that a game ball has been received in the first start opening 2101 in the transmission information storage area, and starts start winning prize in the command transmission process described above. The command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. In this way, the peripheral control board 4140 can execute a hold pre-reading effect, which will be described later, using the start opening prize command.

  Further, the main control program is triggered by the fact that new first start memory information is stored in the first start memory information storage area (that is, the number of first start memory information of the first special symbol has increased). Then, it is determined whether or not the following preceding determination condition is satisfied. As the preceding determination condition, any one or any of the above-described jackpot determination random number storage area, special symbol random number storage area, reach determination random number storage area, variation pattern random number storage area 1, and variation type random number storage area It is possible to exemplify that the random number value stored in the combination is read and the read random number value matches the pre-read determination value for the first special symbol stored in the main control ROM described above (hereinafter referred to as the random number value). , Called “holding prefetch lottery”).

  The main control program determines that the preceding determination condition is satisfied when the read random number value matches the first special symbol prefetch determination value, while the read random number value is the first special symbol. If the pre-read determination value does not match, it is determined that the preceding determination condition is not satisfied. The main control program does not execute a hold prefetch command transmission process, which will be described later, when the preceding determination condition is not satisfied, while when the predetermination condition is satisfied, the following hold prefetch command transmission is performed. Execute the process.

  In this hold prefetch command transmission process, the main control program writes and sets a special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command instructing that the hold prefetch effect should be started for the first special symbol in the transmission information storage area. In the command transmission process, the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 (command transmission means). At this time, the main control program includes the following prefetch information in the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command includes, for example, a special symbol 1 type prefetch command, a special symbol 1 variation pattern prefetch command, a special symbol 1 variation type prefetch command, and a special symbol 1 variation allocation table information prefetch command. , Or any one of these or any combination thereof, and includes pre-read information to be described later. This prefetch information includes the symbol type of the first special symbol, the variation pattern number, the variation type number, and the variation distribution table information.

  This special symbol 1 type prefetch command includes information related to the symbol type of the first special symbol. The symbol type here is, for example, a big hit symbol as a stop symbol indicating that it is a big hit, a small hit symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a small hit, or a lost symbol as a stop symbol that indicates a loss It is the information which shows either. This special symbol 1 variation pattern look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation pattern number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 variation type look-ahead command includes information regarding the variation type number of the first special symbol. This special symbol 1 fluctuation distribution table information prefetch command includes the fluctuation distribution table information of the first special symbol.

  As described above, in the peripheral control board 4140, the effect control program that has received the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command described above uses the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect command, as will be described later, and holds the prefetching that will be described later. Production can be performed.

  In this embodiment, after the main control program shifts the gaming state from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) (winning probability control means), a predetermined period (hereinafter referred to as “preceding”) from this transition point. The notification that the above-described preceding determination condition has been satisfied is suppressed over the “determination suppression range” (predetermined determination suppression means). That is, the main control program reads the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command in the transmission information storage area of the main control RAM over the preceding determination suppression range after the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state in this way. By suppressing the writing and setting of the (preceding determination instruction command), it is possible to suppress the transmission of the special symbol 2 storage prefetch effect command in the command transmission process described above (see FIG. 40). Here, “suppression” indicates not only reducing the frequency but also regulating.

  On the other hand, in the hold history update process, the main control program adds 1 to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM (corresponding to the startup storage information storage area) (step S6208). Further, in this pending history update process, the main control program waits until the start condition corresponding to the at least one start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area is satisfied in the upper special symbol storage display 1184. The at least one start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area is derived by deriving a hold display mode (for example, lighting, blinking, or extinguishing) in a mode capable of specifying the at least one start memory information When the start condition corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is satisfied, the derivation of the hold display mode corresponding to the start storage information to be prioritized is stopped and the priority should be given from the start storage information storage area. The start memory information is erased (holding digestion control means).

  On the other hand, the main control program reaches 4 when the game ball is not accepted at the first start port 2101 in step S6205 or when the counter value of the first hold number counter reaches the upper limit value in the process of step S6206. If yes, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

[Variation start processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process illustrated in FIG. 63.
In this variation start process (step S6130), the main control program first determines whether or not the values of the two reserved number counters of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both 0 (step S6301). . Here, the value of the number-of-holds counter of the first special symbol indicates the number of first start storage information (random number values) stored in the first start storage information storage area in the start storage information storage area described above. The value of the second special symbol holding number counter indicates the number of second starting storage information (random value) stored in the second starting storage information storage area in the above-described starting storage information storage area. . If the main control program determines in step S301 described above that the value of the number-of-holds counter for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0, the start conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are both After determining that it has not been established and ending this variation starting process and ending the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms as described above.

  On the other hand, if the main control program determines in step S6301 that the value of the number-of-holds counter for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not 0, the start condition is set for at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is determined that the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and it is determined that the engine is in a so-called start suspension state. Next, the main control program determines whether or not the value of the number-of-holds counter of the second special symbol is 0, that is, whether or not the number of second start storage information is 0 (step S6302).

  If it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second start memory information is not zero, the main control program acquires the second start memory information (second special symbol random number value) (step S6303), and then the second start described above. A predetermined number of second start storage information stored in the storage information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6304). More specifically, the main control program stores the second start storage information (random value) stored in the n th storage area (n is a natural number of 2 or more) obtained by dividing the second start storage information storage area into a plurality. Are shifted and stored in the (n-1) th storage area. Thereby, at least a storage area is vacant, and new start-up storage information of the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the vacancy occurs. At the same time, the main control program sets the special symbol variation flag to 1 (step S6305), and subtracts 1 from the value of the second special symbol hold number counter, that is, the number of the second start memory information (step S6306). . At the same time, the main control program controls the lighting of the lower special symbol memory display 1187 so as to indicate the number of second start memorized information after the subtraction (the number of second special symbols held). Note that the special symbol variation flag set to 1 in this way is reset when the processing flag is updated to 0 after the variation start processing is completed, for example.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6302 that the number of second startup storage information is 0, the main control program acquires the first startup storage information (first special symbol random number value) (step S6307) and then described above. A predetermined number of first start memory information stored in the first start memory information storage area is shifted and stored (step S6308). Specifically, each of the first start storage information storage area and the second start storage information storage area is provided with four storage areas (first to fourth sections). In each of these storage areas, a jackpot determination random number storage area in which the jackpot determination random number value is stored, a jackpot symbol random number storage area in which the jackpot symbol random number value is stored, and a reach determination random number value. A random number storage area for reach determination to be stored, and a random pattern for random pattern 1, 2 storage area for storing variable display pattern random values of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, are provided.

  The main control program stores the second start storage information (random number) stored in the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage area divided into a plurality of the first start storage information storage areas. Shift to the storage area. As a result, at least a storage area becomes empty, and new start-up storage information of the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the empty has occurred. At the same time, the main control program sets 2 to the special symbol variation flag (step S6309), and subtracts 1 from the value of the first special symbol hold number counter, that is, the number of second start memory information (step S6310). . In addition, the main control program controls the lighting of the upper special symbol memory display 1184 so as to indicate the number of first start memory information after the subtraction (the number of first special symbols held). The special symbol variation flag set to 2 in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to 0 after the variation start processing ends.

  Next, the main control program confirms the contents of the jackpot flag and determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state (step S6312). When the gaming state is not the probability variation state, the main control program selects the probability variation function non-operation jackpot determination table set with a low probability of jackpot (step S6313). On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the main control program selects a probability variation function activation determination table set with a high probability of winning a jackpot (step S6314).

  Next, based on the selected table, the main control program receives the first special symbol random number value or the second special symbol random number value (hereinafter also referred to as “big hit determination random number value”) acquired in step S6303 or step S6307. It is determined whether or not the value (random number corresponding to jackpot) matches (step S6315). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a predetermined winning condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied (lottery means). If it matches the jackpot value, the main control program is the jackpot of the jackpot type based on the jackpot determination random value, that is, the type that activates at least one of the probability variation function and the time-shortening function (status type related to the gaming state) This is determined (step S6316). Next, the main control program sets a jackpot flag corresponding to the determined jackpot type to ON (step S6317). On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number obtained in step S6315 does not match the jackpot value, the main control program executes step S6318 described later. Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 1 (step S6318).

[Variation pattern setting process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.
First, the main control program determines which jackpot flag is ON (step S6401). When it is determined that any of the jackpot flags is ON, the main control program executes a jackpot variation pattern table setting process (step S6402). In this jackpot variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern table for winning a jackpot (a jackpot variation pattern table as a variation pattern table at the time of winning) is set, and if the winning conditions are satisfied, the variation for winning the jackpot A pattern (variation pattern at the time of winning) is determined (variation pattern setting means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program functions as a reach lottery means and has been stored in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM and the start condition is satisfied. Regarding the stored information, the reach condition as a condition to execute a reach effect that implies that the winning condition may be satisfied, that is, the special lottery may be won, or the reach condition is specified. It is determined whether or not the reach condition is satisfied (step S6403). Note that the reach condition here means that it is relatively unlikely that the winning condition is satisfied, and it is easy for the player to hold the expectation of winning the special lottery relatively easily. Normal reach as an example, and a specific aspect of reach production that makes it relatively easy for players to hold the expectation of winning a special lottery with a relatively high probability of winning This is a condition for executing any one of the super-reach as an example. On the other hand, the specific reach condition described above is a condition for executing this super reach. Hereinafter, such determination is also referred to as “reach lottery”.

  By the way, the main control program stores the winning probability of such reach lottery, that is, the probability that the reach condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as “reach lottery winning probability”) in the start storage information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Control is performed so as to change in stages according to the number of already-started storage information. Specifically, the main control program, when the winning probability of the reach lottery is, for example, when it is 0, 1/15 or 1 according to the number of stored start storage information (so-called holding number) Is controlled so that 1/14, 2 is 1/13, 3 is 1/10, and 4 is 1/10.

  On the other hand, as the reach condition as described above, the main control program determines that the reach determination random number value acquired in the reach determination random number storage area of the main control built-in RAM is the next within the range that the reach determination random number can take. It is determined whether or not it belongs to a specific range. As a range that such reach determination random numbers can take (for example, 0 to 199 is exemplified), the main control program always reaches a reach range (0 to 10) that satisfies the reach condition, and always specifies a specific reach condition in the reach range. The specific reach range to satisfy (0 to 1), the reach condition or the non-reach range that cannot satisfy the specific reach condition (15 to 199), and the reach condition or the specific reach condition may be satisfied. The reach / non-reach range (10 to 14), which may not be satisfied, is managed separately (random number range information control means).

  Further, the main control program has already described a reach random number range command (see FIG. 36) indicating a random number range (reach range, specific reach range, non-reach range, or reach / non-reach range) to which the reach determination random value belongs. Are written in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and are transmitted in the command transmission process described above (random number range information control means). That is, the main control program associates each start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, instead of transmitting the determination reach random number value itself to the peripheral control board 4140. The reach random number range command is transmitted as information on the random number range to which the reach determination random value belongs. The reach random number range command corresponds to the first special symbol reach random number range command indicating the random number range to which the reach random number value corresponding to the start memory information related to the first special symbol and the start memory information related to the second special symbol. This command name is a generic name for the second special symbol reach random number range command representing the random number range to which the reach random number value belongs (see FIG. 36).

  When it is determined that the reach condition described above is satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the main control program executes a reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6404). In this reach-losing variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (reach-losing variation pattern table) for executing a reach effect to make a loss.

  At this time, the main control program determines whether or not the time reduction function is operating. When the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is activated (time reduction), the main control program performs the above-described reach effect and causes a loss. A variation pattern table including a pattern (time-short non-winning variation pattern) (time-short reach-losing variation pattern table as a time-short non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means). On the other hand, if the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction), the main control program executes the reach effect described above and A variation pattern table (a non-temporal non-temporal reach variation variation pattern table as a non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) including a variation pattern (non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means). In the following description, the short-time reach loss variation pattern table and the non-short-time reach loss variation pattern table are also collectively referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern table”. In the present embodiment, the main control program has not only “big hit”, “small hit” and “losing” as the lottery result of the lottery on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols, but also this “losing” is activated by the time shortening function. It is also controlled separately whether it is a “non-short-time loss” as a “lack” in a state where the time-shortening function is not performed or a “short-time loss” in a state where the time-shortening function is activated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6403 that the reach condition is not satisfied, that is, when it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, the main control program executes a non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process (step S6405). In this non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process, the main control program sets a variation pattern table (non-reach loss variation pattern table) that is lost without executing the reach effect. A non-reach loss variation pattern table is prepared in correspondence with a plurality of gaming states, and a plurality of types are prepared. It has become.

  Even when it is determined that the reach condition is not satisfied, the main control program similarly determines whether or not the time reduction function is operating, and similarly to the above, whether or not the time reduction function is operating. The variation pattern table to be set may be changed according to the above. In other words, the main control program loses the game without executing the reach effect described above when it is determined that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is activated (time reduction). For this purpose, a fluctuation pattern table (time-short non-reach fluctuation pattern table as a time-short non-winning fluctuation pattern table) including a fluctuation pattern (time-short non-winning fluctuation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means). On the other hand, when the main control program determines that the winning condition is not satisfied as described above and the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction), the main control program loses without executing the reach effect described above. A variation pattern table (a non-temporal non-reach loss variation pattern table as a non-temporal non-winning variation pattern table) is set (variation pattern setting means).

  The main control program (variation pattern setting means) determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the table set as described above (step S6410), the pattern command and the winning information of the variation pattern of the special symbol thus determined. The command is written and set in the transmission information storage area (step S6411). Hereinafter, these pattern commands and winning information commands are collectively referred to as “variation pattern commands”. The pattern command of the variation pattern includes information regarding the variation time of the special symbol, and the winning information command includes a winning result regarding the jackpot.

  Furthermore, the main control program sets the value of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the variation pattern table set as described above in the timer (step S6412). That is, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a jackpot variation pattern table, the main control program determines the jackpot variation time according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the jackpot variation pattern table. To the timer. On the other hand, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a small hit variation pattern table, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on this small hit variation pattern table, Set the variable time for the timer.

  Further, the main control program, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a short-time reach loss variation pattern table, according to the special symbol variation pattern determined based on the short-time reach loss variation pattern table, Set the time change variable for the timer to the timer. On the other hand, when the variation pattern table set as described above is a non-temporal reach reach variation variation pattern table, the main control program responds to the special symbol variation pattern determined based on the non-temporal reach reach variation variation pattern table. Then, the variable time for non-short-time reach is set in the timer. As described above, even when the lottery result of the special lottery is “losing”, the variation time of the special symbol is made different depending on whether or not the time reduction function is activated.

  Here, the main control program manages the basic variation time and the addition variation time as 2-byte data as the variation time of such a special symbol, and the maximum variation time that is the total value of these times is set. 262.144 s (65536 × 4 ms) × 2 = 524.288 s, and a special symbol variation time twice as long as before, in which each time is managed by 1 byte, is realized.

  When the value of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as described above is set in the timer, the main control program next sets the special symbol LED operation flag to ON (step S6413). When the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON, the main control program is specified based on the value of the special symbol variation flag set in step S6305 or step S6309 described above when the start condition is satisfied. At least one of the upper special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the lower special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) is caused to start a variable display composed of a plurality of LED lighting patterns according to the determined variation pattern (design). Fluctuation control means). Finally, the main control program updates the processing flag to 2 (step S6414) and ends the variation pattern setting process as described above.

  Thus, when set in the variation pattern setting process, the main control program receives the pattern command and winning information command already written in the transmission information storage area in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Read out and transmit to the peripheral control unit 4140.

[In-flight processing]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process illustrated in FIG. 63.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the variation time set in the timer in the aforementioned step S6412 (see FIG. 66) has expired (step S6501), and the variation time set in the timer is timed. If it is not up, the changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time set in the timer has expired, the main control program sets the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the above-described step S413 to OFF (step S6502). Then, the main control program reads the upper special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the lower special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) according to the special symbol variation flag set in the above-described step S6305 or step S6309. Is used to stop the change display (special symbol change) with the change pattern of the lighting, extinguishing or blinking mode of the 7-segment LED, and according to the established conditions described above, the stop mode is set. Stop symbols are displayed (design variation control means). In other words, the main control program starts the special symbol variation display when the start condition is met after the start condition is met, and then the winning condition is determined when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed. A stop symbol corresponding to the result is displayed (symbol variation control means).

  Next, the main control program writes and sets a fixed stop command in the transmission information storage area described above (step S6503). This fixed stop command is a command indicating that the change of the special symbol is finished and the predetermined stop symbol is fixed. The main control program reads the fixed stop command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process included in the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. Thereby, the peripheral control board 4140 can recognize that the stop symbol of the special symbol that has been variably displayed has been determined.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S6504). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 3 (step S505) and ends the changing process.

  By the way, in a general gaming machine, when the game ball is received at the start port and the start condition is satisfied, there is no start memory information (hereinafter also referred to as a holding ball) in which the start condition has been satisfied before that. A special symbol variation display is started, and a stop symbol is displayed when a predetermined variation time has elapsed. At the same time, in such a general gaming machine, after the start condition is established, a special lottery is subsequently executed. See literature). In this way, when the gaming state transitions, for example, the game content associated with the stored ball that has been stored before the transition of the gaming state may be executed after the transition of the gaming state. It seems that there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the processing flag is updated to 3 (that is, triggered by the transition of the gaming state, for example), it is determined that the main control program is to be transferred next. After writing a command representing the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “transfer destination command”) to the transmission information storage area, the main control program then transfers the transfer destination command to the peripheral control board 4140 in command transmission processing (S92). Send to. As will be described later, the main control program keeps the gaming state in the normal gaming state if the winning condition is not satisfied, but if the winning condition is satisfied, the main control program responds to the established winning condition from the normal gaming state. The game state is shifted to a more advantageous game state, and thereafter, the game state is changed back to the normal game state (game state control means). Therefore, the main control program transmits a transfer destination command indicating that the game state has been changed to the predetermined game state to the peripheral control board 4140 when the game state has been changed (post-migration game state notification means). . On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 4140, based on the transfer destination command received from the main control board 4100, the transferred game state is taken into consideration, and the performance operation in a mode that does not give a sense of incongruity due to the difference in the game state before and after the transfer Control.

  As a first example for making it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, the following can be considered. First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4140a normally executes the rendering operation without being subjected to special restrictions from the main control board 4100 when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. In the first example, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the transfer destination command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can surely grasp that the gaming state has shifted based on the transfer destination command. By the control on the substrate 4100 side, for example, the execution of the rendering operations such as the reserved pre-reading effect and the reach effect are restricted. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the production operation to give the player a sense of incongruity due to the difference in the gaming state before and after the transition.

  On the other hand, as a second example for making it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, the peripheral control board 4140 uses, for example, a start condition based on the transfer destination command received by the peripheral control MPU 4140a from the main control board 4100. If the gaming state at the first time point when the starting condition is satisfied is different from the gaming state at the second time point when the starting condition is satisfied with respect to the starting memory information that is established, the effect operation is performed in consideration of the shifted gaming state. You may make it control.

  In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the transition destination command later, when the gaming state is transitioned, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can immediately grasp that the gaming state has transitioned, and therefore transitions. It is possible to control the production operation so that the game content linked to the game state does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  By the way, the processing flag being 3 indicates that the variation display of the special symbol is stopped as indicated by the fact that the jackpot has been won. Although not shown in the flowchart, 0 is set as an initial value to a situation identification flag for identifying a gaming state in a jackpot game preparation process to be described later together with the process of updating the process flag to 3 in step S6505.

  The main control program uses the upper special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) or the lower special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) corresponding to the special symbols that have been variably displayed as described above, and the winning conditions established. The stop symbol corresponding to is displayed (stop symbol control means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6504 that the big hit flag is not ON, the main control program updates the processing flag to 0 (step S6508) and ends the changing process. In this case, since the main control program is not accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, the main control program regulates the writing of the transition destination command to the transmission information storage area. Note that the processing flag of 0 indicates that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped as shown that the jackpot is not won.

[Big jackpot game preparation processing]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game preparation process shown in FIG.
First, the main control program determines whether or not the status identification flag is 0 (step S6621). Note that the value of the status identification flag is set to 0 when the processing flag is updated to 3, as described above.

  As described above, this situation identification flag is a flag for identifying the gaming state in the jackpot game preparation process. For example, a situation identification flag of 0 means initial setting, a situation identification flag of 1 means that an explanation interval effect is being performed, and a situation identification flag of 2 means that It means that the game mode determination process is being performed, and that the situation identification flag is 3 means that the jackpot start interval effect is being performed.

  When the jackpot game preparation process is executed first, as a result of setting the situation identification flag to 0, the main control program writes and sets the explanation interval effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6622). The main control program transmits the explanation interval effect command set in this way to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the timer interrupt process executed around every 4 ms in the command transmission process described above. Next, the main control program sets the explanation interval effect timer (step S6623), then sets 1 to the situation identification flag (step S6624), and ends the jackpot game preparation process. The timer value set in the explanation interval effect timer is decremented by 1 in the timer subtraction process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms by the main control program.

  Here, the explanation interval effect mentioned above means that when a display effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the big hit is not a big hit of a specific type ( In other words, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 explains the game procedure until the jackpot game is actually started (when it is a normal type jackpot). When the jackpot is a specific type of jackpot, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a display effect that the 16-round jackpot game is executed in addition to the display effect that the jackpot is won.

  By the way, the next processing cycle of the jackpot game preparation processing is 4 ms later. If the processing flag is 3 and the situation identification flag is set to 1, as a result of determining in step S621 that the situation identification flag is not 0, the main control program determines whether or not the situation identification flag is 1. Is determined (step S6625). In this case, since the situation identification flag is set to 1, the main control program determines whether or not the explanation interval effect has timed up (step S6626). If the explanation interval effect has not timed up, the main control program ends the jackpot game preparation process. Hereinafter, until the explanation interval effect times out, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and YES in step S6625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 1 of the situation identification flag. The processing routine for determining NO in step S6626 is repeatedly executed.

  When the explanation interval effect timer expires in step S6626, the main control program starts the operation of the condition device assuming that the explanation interval effect has ended (step S6627). Next, the main control program determines whether or not the time reduction function is activated (step S6628). If the time reduction function is activated, the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S6629).

  On the other hand, when the time reduction function is not activated, the main control program writes and sets the gate effective effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6636). The main control program reads the gate effective effect command from the transmission information storage area and transmits it to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process which is a part of the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms. The peripheral control unit 4140 can recognize that the execution of the gate effective effect described later is permitted with the reception of the gate effective effect command. Furthermore, the main control program sets 2 to the situation identification flag (step S6630), and ends the jackpot game preparation process as described above.

  Here, the gate effective effect means that the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are enabled after the above-described explanation interval effect is completed (by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R). This is an effect display for informing the player by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that the detection of the game ball has been validated. Although details will be described later, as this gate effective effect, for example, a display prompting the player to select which type of jackpot game shown in FIG. 76 described later is executed, or as shown in FIG. 77 described later. In this case, a display indicating that the current timing is a harassment type timing or a display indicating that the current timing is a pounding type timing as shown in FIG. 78 described later can be given.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when winning in the big hit lottery, the start timing of the big hit game can be freely determined by the player's intention. That is, the peripheral control unit 4140 that has received the gate effective effect command displays a display screen (see FIG. 76) indicating that the effect control program prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game to execute. After displaying on the side liquid crystal display device 1900, or while displaying the display screen, it may be displayed that it is possible to take a break before the big hit game.

  On the other hand, as a result of setting the above-described processing flag to 3 and setting the status identification flag to 2, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next cycle, the main control program determines NO in step S6621, and NO in step S6625. Determination is made, the process proceeds to step S6631, and it is determined whether or not the value of the status identification flag is 2 (step S6631). In this case, since 2 is set in the situation identification flag, the main control program determines YES in step S6631 and performs the following jackpot gaming state determination process (step S6632).

[Big hit game mode decision processing]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot gaming state determination process shown in FIG. 63, and FIG. 70 is an example of a table used in the jackpot gaming state determination process.

  In the jackpot gaming mode determination process, the main control program is for determining the jackpot gaming mode when triggered by the distribution detection sensor 2580L detecting the passage of the game ball to the left gate or the allocation detection sensor 2580R of the game ball passing through the right gate. Get a random value (random number for round number determination). The main control program includes the acquired jackpot game mode determining random value (round number determining random value), the type of jackpot flag in a flag ON state (a specific type jackpot flag or a normal type jackpot flag), The execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined based on whether the passed gate is left or right.

  In this jackpot game mode determination process, the main control program first determines whether or not the delay of the game ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor, that is, the game ball passes through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creation means 2586. It is determined whether or not (step S6071). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586, the main control program determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (step S1). S6072).

  When a game ball is detected with a delay in step S6071, the main control program does not determine whether or not the distribution detection sensor 2580L has detected even if the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L. That is, when a game ball is detected in delay in step S6071, the main control program invalidates the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L.

  In step S6072, if the distribution detection sensor 2580R does not detect that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R, the main control program ends the jackpot game state determination process and ends the jackpot game preparation process. Return to the interrupt process and execute it.

  Hereinafter, until a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 2 of the situation identification flag, and determines NO in step S625. It determines, and it determines with YES in step S6631, and in a jackpot game mode determination process, it determines with YES in step S6071 and repeats the process routine determined with NO in step S6072.

  On the other hand, when the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R in step S6072, the main control program determines that the big hit flag in the flag ON state, that is, the big hit flag turned on in step S6317 is a specific type. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit flag (step S6073). If the specific type of jackpot flag is ON in step S6073, the main control program determines the jackpot game mode with reference to the right gate 2575R of the table B shown in FIG. 70 (step S6074). That is, the main control program uses the upper special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) or the lower special symbol display 1186 (variable display means) after the variation time after the start condition is satisfied for the current start storage information. A stop symbol corresponding to the established winning condition is displayed, and if the winning condition is satisfied, then, as will be described later, the normal gaming state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state corresponding to the established winning condition ( Gaming state control means). For example, the main control program shifts to the first special game state when the established winning condition is the first winning condition, while the second special condition when the established winning condition is the second winning condition. Transition to the gaming state (gaming state control means).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6073 that the specific type jackpot flag is not ON (that is, the normal type jackpot flag is ON), the main control program refers to the right gate 2575R of table A in FIG. Is determined (step S6075).

  Here, as can be seen by referring to the table A in FIG. 70, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. Is passed (when a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out during the jackpot game is the same, although the mode of the jackpot game executed is different ( They do not have to be exactly the same as long as they do not impair gameplay).

  Further, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the main control program sets the 6-round jackpot game and the 12-round jackpot game to 50% each. The probability is determined. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the main control program sets 50% each of the 2 round jackpot game and the 16 round jackpot game. The probability is determined.

  If the delay is not detected in step S6071, that is, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586, the main control program uses the distribution detection sensor 2580L to move the game ball to the left. It is determined whether or not the gate 2575L has been passed (step S6076).

  If it is not detected in step S6076 that the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L, that is, if no game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines that step S6076 is NO and determines the big hit game mode. The process exits from the process and returns to the jackpot game preparation process, and further executes the jackpot game preparation process, and executes a timer interrupt process every 4 ms.

  Hereinafter, until the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 2 of the situation identification flag, and determines NO in step S6625. It determines, and it determines with YES in step S6631, and in a jackpot game mode determination process, it determines NO in step S6071 and repeats the process routine determined to be NO in step S6076.

  On the other hand, when the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L in step S6076, that is, when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the main control program reads the big hit flag in the flag ON state, that is, in step S6317. It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag that has been turned ON is a specific type of jackpot flag (step S6077). If the specific type of jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S6077), the main control program determines the jackpot game mode with reference to the left gate 2575L of table B shown in FIG. 70 (step S6078).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6077 that the specific type jackpot flag is not ON (that is, the normal type jackpot flag is ON), the main control program refers to the left gate 2575L of Table A and executes the jackpot game. A mode (the number of rounds in the present embodiment) is determined (step S6079).

  When the execution mode of the jackpot game (the number of rounds in the present embodiment) is determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 or step S6079, the main control program starts the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (step S6080). . Next, the main control program determines whether or not the probability changing function is in operation when the accessory continuous operation device is operated (step S6081).

  If it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is in operation, the main control program stops the probability variation function in step S6082, and executes step S6083 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is not operating, the main control program directly executes step S6083 while skipping step S6082.

  In step S6083, the main control program sets the operation mode of the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B based on the jackpot game mode determined in step S6074, step S6075, step S6078 and step S6079 (step S6083).

  The operating modes of the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B are, for example, the maximum winning number of round games in which the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B are repeatedly opened in the big hit game, and the special winning openings 2103A and 2103B in each round game. Set the opening mode of the big winning openings 2103A, 2103B in the big hit game, such as the upper limit number (for example, 9) that the game ball can enter and the opening / closing operation time limit of the opening / closing members 2106A, 2106B in each round game It is.

  Next, the main control program is a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started, a round information command indicating the determined number of rounds, and the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game is already being performed. A flag, etc. are set (step S6084).

  Although the details will be described later, the main control program transmits the jackpot start command and the round information command set in this way to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (see FIG. 240) described above. Thus, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect during the jackpot game can be selectively executed as the effect associated with the determined round number through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Will come to be.

  Thus, even if the explanation interval effect timer has timed out, the main control program will not play the jackpot game unless it detects the passing of the game ball to the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R). The progress is stopped and the next process is not executed in the jackpot game mode determination process. That is, even if it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the process of step S6315 and the condition device is activated (step S6604), the main control program does not proceed with the jackpot game as it is, but instead the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate). Until the passing of the game ball to 2575R) is detected (steps S6072 and S6076), the big hit game is stopped.

  As described above, here, if the player who touches the display screen of FIG. 74 or FIG. 75 does not drive the game ball into the distribution unit 2550 (right-handed) by the player's intention, the jackpot game Will not be started, so it is easy to immediately notice that the player can take a break before the jackpot game starts, and make the player recognize the content of the message more reliably be able to. Further, as a display timing, when the player is enthusiastic about the game, the game can be temporarily interrupted by the player's intention, and a break can be taken in this state or the player can go to the toilet.

  Thereafter, when the game ball is fired to the sorting unit 2550 by the player's intention, the main control program detects the game ball by the sorting sensor 2580L or the sorting sensor 2580R, and based on this, the jackpot game Is canceled in step S6072, or YES is determined in step S6076, and one of step S6074, step S6075, step S6078, and step S6079 is executed, thereby achieving a big hit The execution mode (number of rounds) of the game can be determined, and the jackpot game in the determined execution mode can be started. Thereby, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention, and the moment of starting the jackpot game is not overlooked, so that the player's interest in the game can be prevented from being impaired.

  Next, the main control program sets the jackpot start interval effect command (step S6085), sets the jackpot start interval effect timer to, for example, 8 seconds (step S6086), and sets 3 to the situation identification flag (step S6087). ), The jackpot game mode determination process is ended and the process returns to the jackpot game preparation process and is executed. Further, the jackpot game preparation process is ended and a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms. This jackpot start interval effect is a display effect that is performed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from when the accessory continuous operation device is activated until the opening and closing of the opening and closing device 2106 is started. This is a display effect or the like indicating that the jackpot game is started.

  The jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process described above (see FIG. 240). Thereby, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect display indicating that the big hit game is started is performed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  By the way, according to steps S6621 to S6629, the main control program continuously operates the time-saving function until the explanation interval effect time elapses in a series of lottery processes for execution of the jackpot game. In other words, despite the fact that the big win is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the time reduction function is activated by deferring the start of the condition device while the explanation interval effect is being performed. In this case, during the execution of the explanation interval effect, the entry of the game ball into the second start port 2102 is facilitated.

  When the jackpot game mode determination process described above is completed, the processing flag is 3, and as a result of setting the status identification flag to 3, in the jackpot game preparation process of the next period of 4 ms, the main control program determines NO in step S6621. It determines, and it determines with NO in step S6625, determines with NO in step S6631, moves to step S6633, and determines whether or not the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6084 has timed up (step S633).

  If the jackpot start interval effect has not timed up, the main control program determines NO in step S6633, hunts the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interruption process routine to execute it. Hereinafter, until the jackpot start interval effect times out, the main control program determines NO in step S6621 and determines YES in step S625 based on the value 3 of the processing flag and the value 3 of the situation identification flag. The processing routine for determining NO in step S6626 is repeatedly executed.

  When the jackpot start interval effect is timed up, the main control program determines YES in step S633 and updates the processing flag to “4” assuming that the jackpot start interval effect has ended (step S6634). Next, the main control program sets the status identification flag to 0 and returns it to the initial value (step S 6635), ends the jackpot game preparation process, and returns to the timer interrupt process routine for execution.

[Big hit game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S6220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game process.

  In the jackpot game process described above, the main control program first determines whether or not the big prize opening 2103A, 2103B is open (step S6801). When the big prize opening 2103A, 2103B is being opened, the main control program determines that the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103A, 2103B has reached the opening / closing operation limit time set in step S6803. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S6802). If it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed, the main control program closes the special winning openings 2103A, 2103B by closing the opening / closing members 2106A, 2106B (step S6804).

  However, even if it is determined in step S6802 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet elapsed, the main control program does not receive the prize winning opening 2103A, 2103B after opening the prize winning opening. If the number of game balls that have entered 2103A and 2103B is greater than or equal to the upper limit (for example, 9) set in step S6803, the process proceeds to step S6804 and the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B are displayed. Closed. On the other hand, if the opening / closing operation restriction time set in step S6802 has not yet elapsed and the number of game balls received in the big winning openings 2103A, 2103B in step S6803 has not yet reached the upper limit, the main control is performed. The program ends the big hit game process while maintaining the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6801 that the big prize openings 2103A and 2103B are not being opened, the main control program determines that the number of times the big prize openings 2103A and 2103B are opened by the opening and closing members 2106A and 2106B (the number of round games) is as described above. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in step S6803 (see FIG. 69) has been reached (step S805). If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, the main control program operates one of the opening / closing members 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B in accordance with the winning conditions established as described above, and each of the corresponding large winning opening 2103A or large The winning opening 2103B is opened (step S6806), and the big hit game process is terminated.

  In this way, when one opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B is operated to open one large winning opening 2103A or the other large winning opening 2103B, the main control program is shifted to the first special gaming state. As a result, according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern, for example, the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A is started to allow the game ball to be accepted into one big winning opening 2103A, and then the first special game In response to the transition from one state to another game state, the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A is terminated, thereby suppressing the reception of the game ball to one big winning opening 2103A, or the second special In response to the transition to the gaming state, according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern, the other opening / closing member 2106A The opening of the other opening / closing member 2016A is triggered by the transition from the second special gaming state to the other gaming state after allowing the game ball to be accepted into the other special winning opening 2103A by starting the closing operation. By terminating the operation, the reception of the game ball into the other large winning opening 2103B is suppressed (movable piece opening / closing control means). Here, the expression “suppressing the acceptance of game balls” means that, for example, physical ball acceptance into the big prize opening 2103A or the big prize opening 2103B is regulated, The method indicates that one of the opening / closing members 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B, which should be in a closed state in which it is difficult to receive a game ball, can be forcibly opened to accept a game ball. It is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program confirms that the winning condition has been established by stopping the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. The state is shifted to a state in which execution of the opening / closing operation (big hit game) of one opening / closing member 2106A or the other opening / closing member 2106B executed as a condition is restricted. That is, in this case, the main control program is stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separately from the big hit flag in, for example, step S6317 (see FIG. 65) by executing steps S6807 to S6812. Based on the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the execution of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated. Here, in this embodiment, in addition to the jackpot game to be described later, the first special game involving the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A and the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member of the other opening / closing member 2106B as the jackpot winning type. There is a second special game that accompanies it.

  When it is determined in step S6805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the main control program first sets the big hit flag and the big hit game flag to OFF states (step S6807). Then, the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the jackpot game is determined (step S6808).

  Here, in step S6808, the main control program determines whether or not the winning type that activates the probability variation function (the jackpot symbol is, for example, 0, 1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9). In other words, this main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition for determining whether or not a gaming state (probability variation state) in which the winning condition is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state should be established. (Winning probability control means). The main control program sets the probability change state when the probability change transition condition is satisfied, and also sets a transfer destination command in the transmission information storage area as a command indicating a game state determined to be transferred next. Write. On the other hand, the main control program makes a transition to a gaming state other than the probability variation state if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means), and determines the gaming state that is determined to be transitioned next. As a command to represent, the migration destination command is written in the transmission information storage area. Thereafter, the main control program transmits the command written in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92).

  That is, if the main control program determines in step S6808 that the probability variation function is not selected, the main control program stops the operation of the condition device without activating both the probability variation function and the time shortening function (step S6808). S6811). On the other hand, when the main control program determines in step S6808 that it is the winning type that activates the probability variation function, the main control program activates the probability variation function (step S6809). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a probability change transition condition for determining whether or not the probability variation state in which the winning condition is established is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state should be satisfied. If the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the probability that the winning condition is satisfied is shifted to a probability variation state that is set relatively higher than the normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed over a predetermined number of variation display times. While the probability variation state is continued while the variation is displayed, the state is shifted to a gaming state other than the probability variation state when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied (winning probability control means).

  Next, the main control program activates the time reduction function (step S6810), and then stops the operation of the condition device (step S6811). When the time reduction function is activated, the main control program selects each hourly time variation pattern table including a variation pattern group in which the variation time is shortened from the start of the operation to the predetermined number of variations of the special symbol. Corresponding to the length of the variation pattern determined from each hourly variation pattern table, the variation time value of the special symbol is set to the timer shorter than the prescribed variation time value (shortening function control means) . The main control program writes a transfer destination command to the transmission information storage area as a command indicating a gaming state that is determined to be transferred next, and then transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (S92). You may make it transmit. At the same time, the main control program repeats the opening / closing operation of the pair of movable pieces 2105 arranged in the vicinity of the lower start port 2102 according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern until the predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations is reached. A game ball flowing down in the vicinity of the pair of movable pieces 2105 is in a state where it can be easily received by the lower start port 2102. Finally, the main control program sets the processing flag to 0 (step S6812) and ends the big hit game processing.

  In this way, the main control program repeatedly opens and closes the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B in the open mode according to the winning type of the big hit until the number of rounds determined in advance in step 805 is reached. When 2103A and 2103B are in an open state, an instruction for a prize ball operation is performed in accordance with the number of game balls received in the special winning openings 2103A and 2103B.

  Here, in a general gaming machine, the game balls launched into the game area flow down between a number of nails provided in the game area, and some of them enter the start opening or the general start opening. On the other hand, the remaining game balls are discharged out of the game area from the discharge port (so-called out port) formed at the bottom of the game area (see the above reference), but at first glance, Depending on the arrangement of the actors and nails provided in the game area, it is conceivable that the circulation of the game ball is unlikely to be in a suitable state.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, this is solved by the following processing. First, when the winning condition is satisfied, the main control program uses at least one of the determined upper special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the lower special symbol display 1186 (variable display means). After controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern at the time of winning) determined as described above, according to the winning conditions when the winning fluctuation time according to the winning fluctuation pattern has elapsed The stopped symbols are displayed (design variation control means).

  Next, the main control program, when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time reduction function is operating, the upper special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and the lower special symbol display 1186 ( After changing the display of the special symbol in accordance with the above-determined time-short non-winning variation pattern using at least one of the variable display means), the time varying according to this time non-winning variation pattern (time-short non-winning variation time) ), The stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special lottery is displayed (design variation control means).

  Next, the main control program, when the winning condition is not satisfied and the time reduction function is not activated, the above-determined upper special symbol display 1185 (variable display means) and lower special symbol display 1186 ( After changing the display of the special symbol according to the determined non-short-time non-winning variation pattern using at least one of the variable display means), the variation time (non-short-time non-winning) according to this non-short-time non-winning variation pattern The stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed when the time variation time) has elapsed.

  As described above, not only big hits, small hits, and losing, but also the special symbol's change time according to four types (hits, small hits, short-time lost, and non-short-time lost) of time-lapse lost and non-time-short lost Can be set, the special symbol variation time when the time reduction function is activated and the special symbol variation time when the time reduction function is not activated (non-time reduction) when the special lottery is not won. Because there is a time difference between the time and the non-winning time, the game ball can be easily discharged from the game area when one of the functions is activated according to the setting of both time. Therefore, regardless of the nail arrangement, etc., the circulation of the game balls will be good, and the performance of discharging the game balls out of the game area (so-called out performance) can be improved compared to the past. It becomes so that. Specifically, the following effects are exhibited by the following usage methods.

  First, as a first usage and effect, in the case of non-temporal loss, the special symbol is stopped at 500 ms as an example of the variation time (non-temporal non-winning variation time). If the special symbol is stopped at 1000 ms, taking the variation time (short-term non-winning variation time) as an example during the so-called right-handed game state where the game ball is launched on the right side of the game, the short-time loss is the non-short-time loss. Since there is a difference in the stop time of the special 500ms symbol, about one extra game ball is fired and the game ball is easily discharged from the game area (out port located at the bottom) and the collection efficiency of the game ball ( So-called out performance) is improved.

  As a second usage and effect, for example, when it is desired to increase the number of game balls to be fired per unit time, the main control program changes the fluctuation time when the result of the special lottery is lost in the short time (non-winning in the short time) As an example, when the variation time is set to 2000 ms, when game balls are fired every 600 ms, for example, about 3 extra game balls are fired, so that the out performance is improved.

  As a third usage and effect, for example, when the payout rate of a game ball in a short time (so-called play rate) is too high, the main control program changes the time of a special symbol for short-time loss (short-time non-winning loss change) By setting a longer (time), it is possible to extend the time zone in which the payout of game balls is concentrated so that the short-time payout rate does not become too high.

  Here, in a general gaming machine as described above, the game balls launched into the game area flow down between a number of nails provided in the game area, and some of them start or general start ports. Many of them enter the big prize opening according to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member covering the big prize opening. As described above, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening or the big winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out according to the received number (see the above reference). In a gaming machine having such a configuration, if a game ball is received in the big prize opening even though it is not in the jackpot game state, the game ball is paid out, and the player who abuses this game is in the jackpot game state There is a possibility that the game ball can be received illegally by allowing the game ball to be received by the big prize opening in some way other than the game state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the winning condition is established and the game state is shifted to the special game state as described later after the start winning is won, a plurality of opening / closing operations are performed according to the established winning condition in the special game state. One opening / closing member (here, the opening / closing member 2106A is illustrated) of the members 2106A and 2106B is executed to perform one opening / closing operation corresponding to one of the plurality of large winning openings 2103A and 2103B (hereinafter referred to as a large winning prize). When the game ball is made easier to accept in the case of the mouth 2103A), the other big winning mouth is in the period excluding the prize ball effective range period from when the one opening / closing member 2103A is opened to the closed state. When a game ball is accepted at (in this example, it becomes a grand prize opening 2103B), it is accepted at the other big prize opening 2103B. It controls to regulate the dispensing control of the game ball according payout control function corresponding to the number of gaming balls.

  Specifically, when the main control program has shifted to the first special game state, the first control period from when one opening / closing member 2103A is opened to when the one opening / closing member 2103A is closed. A first prize ball invalid range period that is a period excluding the prize ball valid range period is set (first payout instruction restricting means). The main control program, when a game ball is received in the other large winning opening 2103B among the plurality of large winning openings 2103A, 2103B within the set first winning ball invalid range period, The output of a game ball payout instruction (prize ball command) by a payout instruction function corresponding to the number of game balls accepted by 2103B is restricted (first payout instruction restricting means).

  On the other hand, the main control program is a period excluding the second prize ball effective range period from when the other opening / closing member 2103B is in the open state to the closed state when the second special game state is entered. A two-ply ball invalid range period is set (second payout instruction restricting means). When the main control program receives a game ball at one of the big prize opening 2103A within the set second prize ball invalid range period, the main control program sets the number of game balls accepted at the one big prize opening 2103B. The output of the game ball payout instruction (prize ball command) by the corresponding payout instruction function is restricted (second payout instruction restricting means).

  In this way, in the first special game state among the plurality of special game states, the opening / closing operation of the other opening / closing member 2106B is not executed, so that the game ball should not be received by the other big prize opening 2103B originally. However, even when the game ball is accepted due to an illegal act or the like, the game ball is not paid out in accordance with the acceptance of the game ball to the other big prize opening 2103B. For this reason, in the first special game state, it is possible to prevent a prize ball that should not be obtained by the player from being acquired. The same applies to the second special game state among the plurality of special game states. That is, since the opening / closing operation of one opening / closing member 2106A is not executed even in the second special game state, the game ball should not be received by one big winning opening 2103A originally, Even when a game ball is accepted by the above, the game ball is not paid out in accordance with the acceptance of the game ball to the one big winning opening 2103A. For this reason, similarly to the above, in the second special game state, it is possible to prevent a prize ball that should not be obtained by the player from being acquired.

  By the way, the main control program considers the detection delay until the game ball that has entered from the entrance of the one big winning opening 2102A is detected by the count switch 2110A, and the above-described first prize ball effective range period (and first At least one of the winning ball invalid range periods) may be set (first payout instruction restricting means). That is, when the main control program has shifted to the first special gaming state, the one opening / closing member 2103A is closed after the first predetermined period has elapsed since the opening / closing member 2103A has been opened. The first prize ball invalid range period, which is a period excluding the first prize ball valid range period until the second predetermined period elapses, is set (first payout instruction restricting means). Note that this can also be applied to the second prize ball valid range period (and the second prize ball invalid range period) in the second special gaming state.

  In this way, even if a game ball is held for a certain period of time inside the prize winning openings 2102A, 2102B, etc., it is prevented that the held game ball is erroneously detected as a result of fraud. be able to.

[16. Advance judgment processing]
The above-described effect control program analyzes a command received from the main control board 4100 and stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in the above-described received command analysis processing (command receiving means), and the command is a special symbol 1 stored command. Or, if it is a special symbol 2 storage command, the reception of this command triggers the start hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery for new start memory information corresponding to the special symbol 1 storage command or the special symbol 2 storage command Is led out to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means) (start hold control means).

  That is, in the effect control program, if the received command is a special symbol memory prefetch effect command (special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command or special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command), the prefetch included in the special symbol memory prefetch effect command Based on the information (for example, information related to the stop symbol of the special symbol), for example, information suggesting the type of jackpot game is acquired, and based on the information, the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or the special symbol 2 is acquired. The game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is caused to derive a start hold display mode that implies the lottery result of the special lottery corresponding to the new start storage information corresponding to the stored prefetch effect command (start hold control means).

  Specifically, when receiving the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command or the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command, the effect control program displays the above-described start hold display mode (for example, “usually as a hold display mode in which it is difficult to expect a big hit) (Exemplary “hold display mode”) from the beginning or from the middle to a special start hold display mode (for example, “gekiatsu hold display mode” is illustrated as a hold display mode that makes it very easy for a player to hold a big win expectation) Reservation pre-reading control is executed that is replaced and led to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (hold pre-reading control means). Hereinafter, such a function is referred to as a “hold prefetch control function”.

  By the way, even in a general pachinko machine, when the starting ballast information is already stored when the starting ball is received at the starting port and the starting condition is satisfied, the start pausing information is supported. There is one that performs a so-called pre-reading effect until the start condition of the special symbol variation display is satisfied (see the above-mentioned reference). Here, if the pachinko machine is provided with means for indicating to the outside that the gaming state has shifted, the gaming state shifts as follows after the start condition is established, and thereafter, the variation display of the variation pattern of the special symbol is displayed. When the start condition for starting is satisfied, the presentation mode determined in the gaming state before the transition is executed in the gaming state after the transition, and at first glance, the player feels uncomfortable. It is also possible to give it.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to another gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state), the main control program as described above causes the preceding determination suppression range from the transition point as described above. For this reason, transmission of the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is suppressed. Therefore, the effect control program recognizes that the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state by receiving the above-described high probability end designation command, and then, as described above, the special symbol 1 storage prefetching effect Based on the suppression of transmission of the command (preceding determination instruction command) and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command (preceding determination instruction command), the holding pre-reading by the holding pre-reading control function as a result over the preceding determination suppression range. Control will be suppressed (holding prefetch suppression means).

  In this way, in the peripheral control board 4140, when the gaming state is shifted as described above, the effect control program starts the main control built-in RAM in the previous gaming state (the probability variation state is exemplified in the present embodiment). Since the hold prefetching effect is not executed for the start memory information in the preceding determination suppression range among the start memory information stored in the memory information storage area, the hold prefetch corresponding to the stored start memory information within the preceding determination suppression range. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable regarding the production.

  As such a preceding determination suppression range, for example, the maximum number of memories that can store the start memory information in the start memory information storage area from before (or after) the timing when the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal game state It is possible to list the number of special symbol variations (for example, four times) corresponding to the start memory information of minutes (for example, four).

  In addition, as the reserved prefetch suppression range, instead, for example, after the gaming state shifts from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area at the time of the transition exists. In this case, it is possible to list the number of fluctuations of the start memory information corresponding to the number of stored start memory information (for example, 1 to 4 in this embodiment).

  In addition, instead of or in addition to this hold-ahead read suppression range, for example, after the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the starting storage stored in the starting storage information storage area at the time of this transition In the case where information exists, the number of start memory information fluctuations corresponding to the number of stored start memory information (for example, 1 to 4 in this embodiment) can be listed.

  In addition, as the reserved prefetch suppression range, for example, after the game state transitions from the probability variation state to the normal game state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area immediately before the transition One display may be sufficient.

  In addition, as the above-described holding prefetch suppression range, instead of the above-described variation count, for example, a time set corresponding to each of the above-described variation counts from the timing when the gaming state transitions from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state. There may be.

  By the way, in general gaming machines, the left decorative symbol, the right decorative symbol, and the middle decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable manner when the starting condition is satisfied after the starting prize is satisfied and the starting condition is satisfied, are stopped in a predetermined order. However, when the reach condition is satisfied, for example, the middle decorative symbol is variably displayed in a form in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are aligned (corresponding to the reach effect described above), and the player is given three He enjoys the expectation that the decorative symbols may move together in a predetermined manner to the advantageous gaming state (see the above-mentioned reference). In such a general gaming machine, it is desired to execute a reach effect on a specific start memory information only at a desired timing due to the effect, and to give a strong psychological impact to a player who is in contact with the reach effect. In some cases, if a reach effect is executed for other start-up memory information before that, the psychological impact may be weakened.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the effect control program controls the reach effect using one of the following two methods (or a combination thereof) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  First, as one method, the production control program corresponds to the start memory information that the start condition is satisfied, and the reach condition described above is satisfied, that is, the result of the special lottery may be won. (Reach effect control means). The effect control program having such a function is based on each reach random number range command and winning information command received as described above, and wins the last starting storage information stored in the starting storage information storage area described above. The condition is satisfied (that is, the result of the special lottery is winning), and the reach determination random number value for the remaining start storage information stored in the start storage information storage area is within the non-reach range. Triggered by the fact that the winning condition is not satisfied (and the special lottery has not been won) for the remaining start memory information, the reach effect is executed on the last start memory information. (Execution control means). After that, in the reach effect corresponding to the last start memory information, the effect control program fluctuates the central decorative symbol over the variable time in a state where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. After the display, the central decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the player recognizes that it is a big hit as a mode in which these three decorative symbols are arranged.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the thundercloud mode is exemplified as the special game state transferred by the effect control program. In this thundercloud mode, the effect control program displays the telop indicating that it is in thundercloud mode from the left to the right on the upper part of the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and displays the left and right variably displayed. At the stage where the reach effect is executed using the three decorative symbols in the center, there is a case where effect control is suggested that suggests that there is a high possibility that the start memory information corresponding to the variation display will reach a big hit. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed in this thundercloud mode, the player can be very strongly aware that it may be a big hit with a high probability, and the interest can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, in the thundercloud mode, in the situation where the result of the special lottery is won for the last start memory information as described above, the reach effect cannot be executed for the remaining stored start memory information. It will be. If it does in this way, the psychological impact given to a player by the reach production performed in the last starting storage information can be made relatively hard to be weakened before that. Thus, the player is psychologically uplifted by the strength of the impact in contact with the suddenly executed reach production, and until the result of the special lottery regarding the last start memory information is disclosed. The game can be continued while enjoying the expectation for the big hit.

  By the way, even if the reach condition is satisfied for the remaining stored start memory information within the preceding determination suppression range described above, the effect control program does not matter whether the start condition is satisfied for the stored start memory information. You may make it not perform reach production. In this way, for example, when the presentation state is controlled as if it is in the probability variation state as the thundercloud mode, for example, even though the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the preceding determination suppression is performed. As described above, it is avoided that the reach effect is executed in spite of the hold prefetch effect being suppressed as described above with respect to the remaining stored start memory information within the range, which may give the player a sense of incongruity. It will be further suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the production control program determines that the reach determination random number value is within the specific reach range within the reach range based on the received reach random number range command, the start condition described above is satisfied. The super reach is executed as an example of the reach production in a specific manner in correspondence with the start storage information. On the other hand, when the production control program determines that the reach determination random number value is other reach range excluding the specific reach range within the reach range based on the received reach random number range command, the start condition is satisfied. The normal reach is executed as the reach effect in the normal mode in correspondence with the start storage information (reach effect control means).

  The effect control program having such a function satisfies the winning condition for the last start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area based on the win information command received as described above (ie, , The result of the special lottery is won), the reach determination random number value is within the specific reach range based on each reach random number range command received as described above, and the above-described start storage information storage area When the reach determination random number value for any specific start storage information is within the other reach range, the normal start (the reach of the normal mode) is determined. (Execution of production) is regulated (reach production regulation means).

  After that, in the reach effect corresponding to the last start memory information, the effect control program fluctuates the central decorative symbol over the variable time in a state where the left and right decorative symbols are aligned on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. After the display, the central decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the player recognizes that it is a big hit as a mode in which these three decorative symbols are arranged.

  When the execution of the normal reach is restricted as described above, in the situation where the result of the special lottery is won for the last start memory information in the thundercloud mode, the specific start memory among the remaining stored start memory information is stored. As for the information, although the normal reach is scheduled to be executed, the execution is canceled. In this way, the psychological impact given to the player by the super reach executed in the last start-up memory information can be made relatively difficult to be weakened by the normal reach that was scheduled to be executed before that. Thereby, the player touches the super reach that is suddenly executed in correspondence with the last start memory information and is psychologically lifted by the strength of the impact, and the result of the special lottery regarding the last start memory information The game can be continued while enjoying a sense of expectation for the big hit until the time is disclosed. In addition, the super reach corresponding to the last start memory information can be stored in the remaining start memory information without passing through the above-mentioned conditions regarding the remaining start memory information stored before that time. Since it is sufficient to cancel the corresponding normal reach, it is possible to start at a desired timing. For this reason, the super reach corresponding to the last start memory information can be incorporated into the game content at a natural timing along the story in accordance with the game control.

  By the way, even if the reach condition is satisfied for the specific start memory information among the remaining start memory information stored within the preceding determination suppression range, the effect control program starts the start condition for the specific start memory information. As described above, the reach effect may not be executed in response to the establishment of the above. In this way, for example, when the presentation state is controlled as if it is in the probability variation state as the thundercloud mode, for example, even though the gaming state has shifted from the probability variation state to the normal gaming state, the preceding determination suppression is performed. It is more effective to give the player a sense of incongruity because it is avoided that the normal reach is executed in spite of the fact that the hold-ahead read effect is suppressed as described above for the specific start-up memory information within the range. Will be suppressed.

  In addition, the effect control program wins the special lottery for the last start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area and the specific reach condition is satisfied, and the start memory information memory is stored before that. When the special lottery is won for the specific start memory information among the remaining start memory information stored in the area and the reach condition is satisfied, the normal reach for the specific start memory information is set as described above. Instead of restricting the execution of, it may be executed as it is. As described above, among the start memory information stored in the start memory information storage area, a plurality of start memory information including the last start memory information and the remaining start memory information is won a plurality of times in a special lottery. However, it is possible to entertain the player with the normal reach that is executed first, and then enter the super reach that is executed later. As a result, even in the lucky situation where the jackpots are almost continuous, as described above, the super reach corresponding to the last start memory information has a psychological impact on the player, and the specific It is possible to maintain the psychological impact that the normal reach executed before that corresponds to the start-up memory information has on the player.

  By the way, in a general pachinko machine, when a game ball starts winning prize, a special symbol is started to be displayed in a variable manner, and a jackpot lottery is executed, and a predetermined winning condition is satisfied and a predetermined probability change transition condition is established. When is established, there is something that shifts to the probability variation state (see reference). As described above, the pachinko machine that shifts to such a probability fluctuation state, as described above, for a predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as “special time”) until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number after the jackpot game ends. There is something that continues the probability variation state (hereinafter referred to as “ST (special time) machine”). In such a special time, until the effect control board (corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140) shifts from the probability variation state to another game state according to the effect command received from the game control board (corresponding to the main control board 4100). A specific effect (hereinafter referred to as a special time effect) is executed. Here, in a general amusement hall, since many pachinko machines are arranged facing each other on each island, the power supplied to each pachinko machine temporarily decreases depending on the power supply equipment and the power usage situation As a result, a momentary power failure occurs (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power outage”). If such a momentary power failure occurs unfortunately at a certain timing, at first glance, some of the special time effects as described above are not executed, and some of the special time effects that the player should have been able to enjoy at all times. There is also a possibility that you cannot enjoy it.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the effect control program has shifted to the probability variation gaming state as the specific gaming state, the special symbol in the probability variation gaming state is an example of the specific gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. A special time effect (specific effect) with a predetermined number of variable display times is started. That is, the effect control program controls a special time effect (specific effect) in which the number of times of display change of the special symbol until the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability change game state (specific effect control means). . On the other hand, even if the effect control program temporarily falls into a situation where the special time effect cannot be controlled, the remaining time of this special time effect is based on the new game state information received next, as will be described in detail later. Production is executed.

  Specifically, even if the effect control program temporarily falls into a state where the special time effect cannot be controlled (specific effect control means), the game state is determined based on the remaining number of times information included in the next received command. Remaining number of times that the special symbol is variably displayed by the time the game state other than the probability variation state is changed, and the remaining number is suggested as a part of the special time performance over the grasped remaining number of times. The number of times effect is executed (remaining number of times effect complementing means).

  In this way, even if the production control program temporarily becomes unable to control the special time production on the peripheral control board 4140 due to, for example, the influence of an instantaneous power failure, the next special symbol variation display is started. As a trigger, it is possible to restart the remaining number of times of the aspect suggesting the remaining number of times as the remaining effects of the special time effect. Players who have been in contact with such a remaining number of productions will have the impression that if the remaining number of times production is restored again after the remaining number of times production is temporarily interrupted, such interruption is also part of the production. Thus, the influence of the momentary power failure described above can be made difficult to play.

[Panel common image display]
Here, as a general pachinko machine, a main liquid crystal display device is provided on a game board, and a special symbol is variably displayed every time a game ball is received at a start port. On the main liquid crystal display device, There are some which display a decorative design that variably displays a special design to be displayed in a variable manner and perform an effect display by causing a character in line with the theme of the gaming machine to appear. On the other hand, some recent pachinko machines are provided with a sub liquid crystal display device on the game board. In such a recent pachinko machine, even when displaying the screens of substantially the same mode on the main liquid crystal display device and the sub liquid crystal display device described above, since the screen sizes thereof are different, each image data is nonvolatile. It was necessary to prepare the video memory separately (hereinafter also referred to as “character ROM”). For this reason, in such a recent pachinko machine, the storage capacity required for the character ROM is likely to be large compared to a general game machine equipped with only the main liquid crystal display device, and other images are relatively free. It seems that there is a risk of squeezing the storage capacity for storing data.

  However, in the present embodiment, the VDP 4160a (production control means) with built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 has different display sizes from the size-converted image data read from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. One frame whose display size is changed to match the display area of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 (one display means) and the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (at least one of the other display means) Are successively generated (size adjusting means). The built-in sound source VDP 4160a sequentially outputs the generated drawing data for one frame to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 for each timer interruption. Common images having different display sizes are displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, respectively.

  In this way, even if a common image with a different display size is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, one size conversion is performed on the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. Since it is sufficient to prepare image data, the storage capacity required for the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b can be reduced as much as possible.

  In order to display the common images having different display sizes on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (corresponding to one display means) and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (corresponding to at least one other display means), respectively. As a specific configuration, first, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a uses the size-converted image data stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b (effect control storage means) under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as shown in FIG. As shown in (A), the display size of the common image is changed while maintaining the aspect ratio so as to substantially match the first width W1 in the horizontal direction of the first display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. First drawing data for forming a main panel image as the first common image is generated. At the same time, the VDP 4160a with built-in sound source maintains the aspect ratio while the first width W1 in the horizontal direction of the display area (first display area) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means) maintains the aspect ratio. The display size of the common image is set to be the second width W2 in the horizontal direction of the display area (second display area) of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (second display means) as shown in FIG. Second drawing data for forming a touch panel image as the changed second common image is generated (size adjusting means).

  The sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the first drawing data generated as described above to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and displays the first common image in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. (First common image control means).

  By the way, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a has at least one start in the decoration hold display area (specific area) which is a part of the lower part in the vertical direction in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display means). A decoration hold display mode is derived in correspondence with the derived hold display mode in such a manner that each stored information can be specified (decoration hold display control means). As this decoration hold display mode, for example, when four pieces of start memory information are already stored in the start memory information storage area, hold balls A, B, C, and D as illustrated can be exemplified.

  When the touch panel image is displayed as the second common image in the display area (second display area) of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the built-in sound source VDP 4160a displays the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 among the touch panel images. A part of the touch panel image is displayed on the display area of the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 except for the part corresponding to the decoration hold display area (specific area) in the area (second common image control means).

  In this way, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a displays the at least one start-up storage information in the display area of the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on one size-converted image data stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b. A main panel image (first common image) that includes a decoration holding display area for visually expressing a decoration holding display mode that can be derived in a mode that can be specified, and has a similar shape to the above-described common image Is displayed in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the decoration hold display area located below the main panel image is removed from the main panel image and the display size is changed (for example, reduced) ( The second common image) is displayed. As a result, as described above, not only the storage capacity required for the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b can be reduced as much as possible, but also the decoration hold display area can be displayed only in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device can be enjoyed through the operation surface of the touch panel 480 while the original game is sufficiently enjoyed so that the player does not excessively watch the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The display contents of the display area 470 can be enjoyed.

[17. Game action]
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is transparent by the player rotating the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game is fired to the upper part in the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the game panel 1200, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. The speed is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the center ball is centered by a plurality of obstacle nails or inclined upper surfaces of the peripheral wall portion 2503. It is guided to the left area of the accessory 2500. In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the distribution space 2530 is distributed via the distribution entry passage 2545. After being sent inward, it is discharged through the guide passage 2540 into the game area 1100 upstream of the big winning ports 2103A and 2103B in the attacker units 2100A and 2100B arranged downstream of the gate portion 2301 and the stage 2510. .

  Then, when a game ball that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 enters and passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate switch 2352, the main ball is based on the detection signal. In the control board 4100, a normal random number as a normal lottery result is generated by the normal random number generation means. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 1189 emits light in either red or green). . The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). When the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 is expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. When “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern in the normal symbol variation pattern selection means can be easily changed by replacing it with a different table and selecting it.

  By the way, in this embodiment, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate switch 2352 while the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol in the fluctuation is stopped and generated / extracted first. Until the result of the normal random number is determined, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is temporarily stored by the normal symbol storage holding means and displayed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on a normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the number of LEDs that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four are stored and displayed. It has become. When the number of memories exceeds 4, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate switch 2352 is discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 and flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 are moved to the center of the game area 1100 below the center accessory 2500 by the shelves 2202 and 2203 of the front side unit 2200. It is supposed to be. When a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 and 2201 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening switch 3020, the main control board 4100 performs payout control based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls The tray 301 is paid out.

  In the case where the game ball thrown into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning openings 2103A, 2103B. The game area 1100 is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 1232 (1151) to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins any of the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the large winning opening 2103A, 2103B, The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side without being returned to the position.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 opened on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is the lowest part after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is released forward. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2511 is supplied to the second stage 2512 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511, and most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. It is discharged forward from the lowered central part.

  The game ball released forward from the second stage 2512 is supplied to the third stage 2513 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the second stage 2512, and becomes the lowest after rolling the third stage 2513 in the left-right direction. It is released backward from the affected part. Then, the game balls released from the third stage 2513 are arranged between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511 and below the third stage 2513 on both the left and right sides of the second stage 2512. After being supplied to 2514 and rolling the fourth stage 2514 in the left-right direction, it is discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a. Further, the game ball released downward from the drop hole 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 is supplied to the fifth stage 2515 disposed immediately below the fourth stage 2514, and after rolling the fifth stage 2515 in the left-right direction. , It is discharged forward from the lowest part on both the left and right sides across the center in the left-right direction and is returned to the game area 1100.

  When a game ball rolling on the stage 2510 enters the first chance entrance 2516 of the first stage 2511 or the second chance entrance 2517 of the second stage 2512, the chance ball 2525 opened just above the first start port 2101 It is discharged into the game area 1100 and is received by the first start port 2101 with a high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the upper start port switch 3022, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are received from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. The payout is made to the upper plate 301.

  Since the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, game balls released from the stage 2510 can be received into the first start port 2101 and the like with a high probability. ing. When the second starting port 2102 is acceptable, it is highly likely that the game ball is received when it is released from the stage 2510. Therefore, not only the first starting port 2101 but also the second starting port 2102 can be It is possible to raise interest by giving expectation about acceptance.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is driven so as to flow down the right side of the center object 2500, the game ball is released to the upstream side of the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B in the attacker units 2100A and 2100B through the distribution space 2530 and the like. Therefore, when the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B are acceptable, the game balls can be received into the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B with a high probability. Accordingly, in a gaming state where the special winning openings 2103A and 2103B are acceptable, it is possible to perform a game ball driving operation so that the game balls circulate in the distribution space 2530. In other words, when the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B are in an acceptable gaming state, the game balls are passed through the distribution space 2530 with a high probability only by striking the game balls more strongly than the predetermined amount to the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B. Can be accepted.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate switch 2352 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, the second start port 2102 is closed as described above. When the pair of movable pieces 2105 expands for a predetermined time to be able to win, and when the winning is possible, when the game ball is received by the second start port 2102 and detected by the lower start port switch 2109, the main control board A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740 via 4100 or the like.

  In the main control board 4100, when the game balls are received by the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and detected by the upper start port switch 3022 and the lower start port 2109, the main control program is A predetermined first special random number is generated / extracted for the first start port 2101, while a predetermined second special random number is generated / extracted for the second start port 2102. Based on the extracted special random number, the main control program extracts the special symbol displayed on the corresponding upper special symbol display 1185 and lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 after starting the variable symbol display. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing members 2106A and 2106B of the attacker units 2100A and 2100B have a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) that opens and closes occurs, and during that time, a lot of game balls can be obtained by winning the game balls in the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B. Note that when one game ball wins the big prize opening 2103A, 2103B, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  However, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests “big hit”, the big hit game does not occur immediately, the explanation interval production is performed, and this explanation interval production timer is based on the time-up. As described above, the condition device, which is one condition for executing the jackpot game, operates.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 2400. When the special symbol is variably displayed or the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball wins the start opening 2101 and the upper start opening switch 3022, When it is detected by the start port switch 2109, the first special random number or the first special number extracted based on the detection signals from the upper start port switch 3022 and the lower start port switch 2109 until the special symbol fluctuation display becomes possible. Two special random numbers are stored in the first start storage information storage area (first start storage information storage means) and the second start storage information storage area (second start storage information storage ) Is adapted to hold the display is stored in, it has become the number of the stored special random numbers, to be displayed in the above special symbol memory indicator 1184 and under special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  These upper special symbol memory display 1184 and lower special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, and the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission states of each LED which is turned off / on / flashing. In this embodiment, up to four of each are stored and displayed. Note that when the number of memories exceeds 4, the extracted special random number is discarded. In addition, the second special random number stored (suspended) in the second starting storage information storage area is executed (digested) in preference to the first special random number stored in the first instruction information storage area by the priority hold digest means. ). That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2102 is executed (digested) in preference to the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2101.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the main control program has predetermined predetermined random numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number extracted based on the detection of the upper start port switch 3022 and the lower start port 2109. The random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) is used to determine whether the special random number is “losing” or “big hit”, and the special symbol is stopped (losing symbol). ) (First special symbol variation pattern selection means, second special symbol variation pattern selection means). In addition, the random number determination table is also used to discriminate such as “probability change short no hit”, “probability change per win”, “prompt change per win”, “probable change short win per”, and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number (the special lottery result) extracted (lottery) when triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 In this case, as described above, the main control program activates a condition device that is one condition for executing the jackpot game based on the time-out of the explanation interval effect timer.

  The advantageous game state generating means executes a jackpot game advantageous to the player, and after opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106A of the attacker unit 2100A or the opening / closing member 2106B of the attacker unit 2100B, the advantageous game state generating means Seconds), or when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103A or the winning prize opening 2103B, the opening / closing member 2106A or the opening / closing member 2106B is closed. A round game of patterns (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). If it is “2R big hit”, it is 2 rounds; Round, 12 rounds for "12R jackpot", 16 rounds for "16R jackpot" De, respectively repeatedly, and is adapted to generate a favorable advantageous gaming state to the player. Note that after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, with regard to “big hit”, the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time / shortness table or the like by the variation pattern table changing means according to the extracted special random number. Note that the mode of the jackpot game is not limited to the above-described round game as long as a predetermined amount of prize balls are paid out.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the extracted first special random number or the second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 is based on the fact that the condition device has been activated. The game ball detection signal from 2580 (2580L, 2580R) can be received, and the number of “big hit” game rounds is determined by which sort detection sensor 2580L, 2580R receives the detection signal first. I try to decide.

  When the game ball detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580 can be received, the relationship between the gate 2575 through which the game ball has passed and the number of rounds is previously stored in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is displayed. That is, “When a game ball is passed to the left gate 2575L, it is determined by lottery among 12 rounds and 6 rounds”, and “16 rounds when a game ball is passed to the right gate 2575R” The relationship between the gate to which the game ball passes and the number of rounds determined based on having passed through the gate, such as “determined by lottery of two rounds” 1900 etc. are displayed.

  Thus, the game ball can be driven while watching the movement of the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 so that the game ball passes through the desired gate 2575 to the player. In addition to being able to entertain the operation, it is possible to be thrilled and thrilled by the distribution of the game balls in the distribution space 2530, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game balls at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (in accordance with the special lottery result) In addition to the variable display of the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 also have special random numbers ( The effect image according to the special lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed (for example, three rows). When the symbols are sequentially stopped and finally all the symbol sequences are finally stopped, the judgment result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. . That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. Note that since the symbols displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like are larger and easier to see than the special symbols of the first and second special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186, generally, a player will use the game board side liquid crystal. Attention is paid to the symbols displayed on the display device 1900 and the like.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the “reach effect image” is displayed so that the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach) As a special lottery result on which this “reach effect image” is displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. In addition, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the “spot game effect image” displayed during the “spot” game.

  It should be noted that the special symbol fluctuation display on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 235). The variable display of symbols on the panel side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. It has become.

  As a result, the variation display of the symbols on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like that is particularly noted by the player is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for a certain command so that the symbol variation patterns in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like can be increased. In addition, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game or the like is also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  In addition to the control of the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on a command related to the lottery result. , 3622, 3640, 3676 and the like, solenoids 3624, 3660 and the like are appropriately operated, and the decorative boards 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320 provided in the game board 4 are provided. The LEDs mounted on 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, 3690, 3692 and the like are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the player can be entertained by a movable effect and a light effect.

  By the way, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, as described above, the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 indicate that it is a “big hit”. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment have different roles to play from the special symbol lottery in the conventional pachinko machine.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, for one result such as the “big hit”, the harassment type and the pounding type. Two types with different jackpot forms such as types are given to the player. In this embodiment, the processing form until the mode of the jackpot game to be executed is determined as the jackpot form is different between the pounding type and the pounding type. And when two types with different jackpot forms, such as a harassment type and a pounding type, are given to a player, one of these is selected. In the present embodiment, when the condition device is activated, a game ball fired toward the game ball by the player passes through the left gate 2575L, and the harassment type is selected. A type is selected.

  It can be said that hits with different execution modes of jackpot games belong to the harassment type and the pounding type. Specifically, as can be seen by referring to FIG. 70, when it is a big hit of the normal type (see Table A), for the harassment type (left gate 2575L), from the 9th round corresponding to the expected value of game ball acquisition However, a 6-round jackpot game where only a small amount of game balls can be obtained and a 12-round jackpot game where a slightly larger number of game balls can be obtained than 9 rounds corresponding to the expected value of the game ball is executed. It can be said that Ruto belongs. In addition, when it is a big hit of a specific type (see Table B), for a rough type (left gate 2575L), a big hit of 16 rounds that can acquire a larger number of game balls than 9 rounds corresponding to the expected value of game ball acquisition It can be said that only the game is played.

  Similarly, with regard to the pounding type with reference to FIG. 70, when the big hit of the normal type (see Table A), the pounding type (right gate 2575R) corresponds to the expected value of game ball acquisition 9 There are 16 rounds of jackpot game that can win a lot of game balls than 9 rounds equivalent to the expected value of game ball acquisition, when 2 rounds of jackpot game where only a small amount of game balls can be acquired than the round is executed It can be said that hits to be executed belong. In addition, when it is a big hit of a specific type (see Table B), for the pounding type (see the right gate 2575R), 16 rounds of game balls can be obtained that are larger than 9 rounds corresponding to the expected value of game ball acquisition. It can be said that only the jackpot game is played.

  When a game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of a specific type when it passes through the right gate 2575R. If it is a big hit of a specific type, refer to the table B in FIG. With a probability of 100%, a 16-round jackpot game is determined to be executed, and if it is not a specific type of jackpot, referring to Table A in FIG. When the jackpot game is executed, it is determined by lottery.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of a specific type when it passes through the left gate 2575L. Then, with a 100% probability, it is determined when a 16-round jackpot game is executed. If it is not a specific type of jackpot game, referring to Table A in FIG. When a round jackpot game is executed, it is determined by lottery. Then, as a result, when the player hits a specific type of jackpot, a 16-round jackpot game is executed regardless of whether the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. It will be decided at the moment.

  By the way, although the mode of the jackpot game to be executed is determined when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R, whether or not the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot of a specific type This is determined in step S6316. Therefore, in the case of a big hit of a specific type, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, before the game ball passes through the gates 2575L, 2575R (for example, the special symbol display 1185, 1186 results in the first special lottery or When the result of the two special lottery is displayed), a display effect indicating that the 16-round jackpot game is executed is performed.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, as long as the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit of the normal type, when the game ball passes the gates 2575L and 2575R, The jackpot form (smooth type or pounding type) is selected. Then, it is determined for any one of the hits belonging to the selected jackpot type, and the jackpot game is executed in the execution mode of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined hit.

  In other words, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, the functions to be performed by the gates 2585L and 2575R differ depending on the type of the jackpot.

  Specifically, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, it is determined that the jackpot symbol is 7 out of the jackpot symbols 0 to 9, and the jackpot symbol is determined to be a jackpot. When a jackpot symbol other than 7 is acquired among symbols 0 to 9, it is determined that the jackpot symbol is a normal type jackpot. As described above, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, it is determined that the normal type big hit is made with high probability, so the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, the distribution detection sensor 2580L). , 2580R) always functions as a member that determines the execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, in steps S6075 and S6079 executed by the main control MPU 4100a, the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L) are always set in the manner of executing the big hit game, respectively. It will serve as a functioning means that functions as a member to be determined.

  However, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot, when the game ball passes the gates 2575L and 2575R, referring to the table B in FIG. However, this lottery is only a formal lottery in which the execution mode of the jackpot is determined in advance. In other words, since 16 game round hit games that are determined in advance are executed based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the gates 2575L and 2575R, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, distribution) The detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as an execution opportunity for the jackpot game.

  That is, since it is always determined as NO in step S6073 and step S6077, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, the distribution detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) are always executed in accordance with the step S6075 and step S6079. However, only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit of a specific type, YES is determined in steps S6073 and S6077, and gates 2575L and 2575R (from Specifically, the distribution detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as members that determine the execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, the steps S6073 and S6077 executed by the main control MPU 4100a are respectively a right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and a left gate 2575L (distribution detection) that always function as members that determine the execution mode of the jackpot game. Function changing means for changing the function so that the sensor 2580L) functions as a member that determines the execution trigger of the jackpot game only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot Will play a role.

  In this embodiment, the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L) always function as members that determine the execution mode of the jackpot game, and the first special lottery Only when the result or the result of the second special lottery is a specific type jackpot, the role to be played by functioning as a member that determines the execution trigger of the jackpot game has been changed, but the function as the gate 2575 is changed. The aspect is not limited to this.

  For example, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, the harassment type is selected, and when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, the pounding type is selected. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by selecting the harassment type when passing and selecting the pounding type when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L.

  Also, for example, it is always possible to select either the harassment type or the pounding type according to the gates 2575L and 2575R through which the game balls pass, and when the specific condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through any gate 2575 Also, the function of the gate 2575 may be changed by changing the selected jackpot form to a pounding type (or a harassment type). Furthermore, even if a game ball is allowed to pass through any gate 2575, only the harassment type (or pounding type) is selected. However, when the specific condition is satisfied, the harassment type or the The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by selecting the pounding type.

  Furthermore, even if a game ball is allowed to pass through any gate 2575, only the harassment type (or pounding type) is selected. However, when the specific condition is satisfied, the harassment type or the The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by selecting the pounding type.

  In addition, for example, when a game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R where the pounding type is selected, there is always a hit between when the first mode jackpot game is executed and when the second mode jackpot game is executed. If the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R for which the pounding type is selected when the specific condition is satisfied, the jackpot game is executed in a mode different from the first mode and the second mode. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by determining it as one of a plurality of hits including (that is, even if it is the same in terms of the pounding type, The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by changing the hits to which it belongs).

  Next, the flow until the jackpot game is started will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 79 from the viewpoint of the player. 73 to 79 are all image diagrams displayed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and FIG. 73 (A) shows that the game description until the jackpot game is started is given. 73 (B) is a guidance display that guides the player's gaze in the game until the jackpot game is started, FIG. 74 is an explanation display about a method of selecting a harassment type jackpot game, and FIG. 75 is pounding. 76 is an explanation display on how to select a type of jackpot game, FIG. 76 is a display prompting the player to select which type of jackpot game is to be executed, and FIG. 77 is a display indicating that the current timing is a harassment type 78 is a display showing that the current timing is a pounding type, and FIG. 79 is a galaxy for watching the player after a pounding type jackpot game is selected. A guidance display to guide on the back lower right direction unit 3600 reminiscent of La drawing device.

  73 to 79 are image diagrams displayed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, as described above. In FIGS. 74 and 75, for the sake of convenience, the distribution unit 2550 is used. 2550 for the picture corresponding to the valve portion 2551b, 2590b for the picture corresponding to the distribution suggesting member 2590, and the left gate 2575L (the distribution detection sensor 2580L). ) Is denoted by reference numeral 2575L (2580L), and the picture corresponding to right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) is denoted by reference numeral 2575R (2580R).

  If the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit, an image indicating that the big hit is displayed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Here, in the case of a conventional pachinko machine, for example, an image indicating that a jackpot game is started or an image indicating a place to be targeted in a jackpot game such as “Aim for the right” is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device. 1900.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit, the image indicating that the conditional device is activated and the big hit is displayed on the game board Although displayed on the side liquid crystal display device 1900, the jackpot game is not started immediately, and the jackpot game is executed only after passing through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R after the condition device is activated. . In this way, the player can proceed with the game according to the player's intention without executing the jackpot game immediately after the condition device is activated, so that the player can play like a conventional pachinko machine. This makes it possible to play the game with peace of mind, without feeling irritated, such as “If you do n’t rush to put a game ball in the big prize opening”.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is distributed to the pounding type side by the distribution unit 2550, the game ball immediately moves to the right gate 2575R. An irregular delay unit 2585 (FIGS. 176, 177, and 180) that creates an irregular accumulation time so as not to pass (so as not to be immediately detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R) is provided by the distribution unit 2550 and the right gate 2575R. (Distribution detection sensor 2580R).

  The irregular delay unit 2585 has a function of irregularly delaying that the game balls distributed to the pounding type side pass through the right gate 2575R (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). The irregular delay unit 2585 is composed of an upper irregular delay creating means 2586 and a lower irregular delay creating means 2587. In this embodiment, a crune is adopted as the lower irregular delay creating means 2587. Such a croon not only delays the passing of the game ball distributed to the pounding type side through the right gate 2575 (detected by the sorting detection sensor 2580R), but the gaming ball is also on the pounding type side. It is possible to set an irregular time to be a time from when it is distributed to the right gate 2575R until it passes through the right gate 2575R (time until it is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). This is because the time for the game balls distributed to the pounding type to roll in the croon is irregular (that is, the time to roll in the crune varies every time).

  Here, an aspect in which the game description from when the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to when the jackpot game is started is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Will be described.

  First, both a character display (see FIG. 73 (A)) and a voice output of “I will explain the target bonus” are performed as a notice display for explaining the game until the jackpot game is started. This prompts the player to stop firing the game ball. Then, as a display for prompting the user to pay attention to the distribution unit 2550, a character display of “Look at the upper right of the board” and a voice output are displayed, and a picture indicating the place where the player should pay attention is displayed (FIG. 73 ( B)). At this time, in order to highlight the place where the player should pay attention, the lighting effect performed on the game area is darkened so as to be plain, and the distribution unit 2550 is blinked. In particular, such a display effect is performed during an interval period in which the progress of the game is forcibly stopped. It is no longer necessary to keep an eye on both objects. Therefore, not only can the game contents be explained to the player with certainty, but the player's viewpoint can be moved naturally to the sorting unit 2550 without being distracted by the trend of the game ball.

  Next, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 indicates that the game ball launched by the player is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side by the distribution unit 2550, indicating that a harassment type jackpot game is executed. When the ball is passed through, the character display and voice output of 12R with a 50% probability and 6R with a 50% probability are displayed, and a picture with an arrow indicating the route on the left gate 2575L side is displayed. (See FIG. 74).

  Also, when the game balls launched by the player are distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side by the distribution unit 2550, it indicates that a pounding type jackpot game is executed. The character display and voice output of “Rounding type of 16R with probability and 2R with probability of 50%” are performed, and a picture showing the route on the right gate 575R side with an arrow is displayed (see FIG. 75).

  As a result, when a player launches a game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate L side, a harassment type jackpot game is executed, and at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate R side When a ball is fired, it can be understood that a pounding type jackpot game is executed.

  After that, the game board-side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays characters such as “Aim for the one you like ♪” and voice output, and the Harahara type has a probability of 12R, 50% with a probability of 50%. A picture indicating that it is 6R and a picture indicating that the pounding type is 16R with a probability of 50% and 2R with a probability of 50% are displayed (see FIG. 76).

  Immediately thereafter, characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” and voice output are performed. At this time, in order to have an impact, characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” are displayed in a form that covers almost the entire area of the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the normal voice Audio output is performed in a mode different from an output mode (for example, a mode in which voice is output by a single character) (for example, a mode in which audio is output simultaneously by a plurality of characters). When the effects shown in FIG. 76 are finished, and a character such as “Aim for the person you like ♪” and voice output are performed, the compulsory interval period ends at this timing, and distribution is performed. Detection of game balls by the detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is validated.

  When the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is validated, when the game ball is fired on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the fired game is released. An image is displayed indicating whether the sphere is timed to be distributed to the left gate 2575 (distribution detection sensor 2580L) or to the right gate (distribution detection sensor 2580R). Specifically, “ON” is displayed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and an indicator is provided on each of the left and right sides starting from this “ON”. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 77, when a game ball is fired while the left indicator is lit, the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side, and a harassment type jackpot game is executed. As shown in FIG. 78, when a game ball is fired while the right indicator is lit, the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side and a pounding type jackpot game is executed. . Thus, the remaining time at each timing can be visually grasped by displaying an indicator as to whether the game ball thus fired is distributed to the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. can do.

  Here, the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an image in which the indicator on the left side is lit as the position of the valve portion 2551b in the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 is switched (for example, FIG. 77) and an image in which the right side indicator is lit (for example, see FIG. 78). That is, when the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched from the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side to the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R, the right side indicator from the image in which the left side indicator is lit The image changes to a lit image. Further, when the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched from the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the right gate 2575R side to the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the left gate 2575L, the left indicator from the image in which the right side indicator is lit. The image changes to a lit image. In this way, the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed based on the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched.

  The time for which the right side indicator and the left side indicator are lit is the time required for the player who sees the lighting mode of the indicator to select the side he / she wants between the harassment type and the pounding type. For example, it is set to 5000 msec. That is, every 5000 msec, the valve unit 2551b of the sorting unit 2550 moves, and accordingly, the image in which the right side indicator is lit and the image in which the left side indicator is lit are switched.

  However, although the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed based on the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched, the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched and the game board side liquid crystal display device When synchronizing with the timing when the image displayed on 1900 is changed, the game balls are distributed to the route on the side contrary to the player's will (the route on the left gate 2575L side or the route on the right gate 2575R side). there is a possibility. This is because the player tends to fire the game ball in consideration of the time from launching the game ball to reaching the sorting unit 2550. For example, if a player is trying to select a pounding type jackpot game, he expects that the left indicator will soon be turned off, May fire. In such a case, there is a possibility that a jackpot game of a type contrary to the will of the player will be executed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timing of switching the position of the valve portion 2551b is within a range in which the position of the valve portion 2551b and the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be aligned. The image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed with a delay. As a result, in anticipation that the lighting of the indicator will end soon, even if the player launches a game ball before the lighting of the indicator ends, It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  “Within the range where alignment between the position of the valve portion 2551b and the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be achieved” means that the game ball was fired while the left indicator was displayed. Regardless, this game ball is routed to the left gate 2575L side even though the game ball is fired while the image on which the right side indicator is lit is displayed. It suffices if it is within a range where there is no such thing as being distributed.

  Then, as a result of the player selecting a pounding type jackpot game, for example, when the launched game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the word “pounding type”. Is displayed covering almost the entire area of the display screen. As a result, there is an expectation that a jackpot game (16R jackpot game) having a prize ball amount larger than the 9R prize ball amount, which is the expected value of the prize ball amount, may be executed in the jackpot game to be executed in the future. It is possible to amplify the feeling and inspire player psychology.

  After that, if the above-mentioned character display of “attention to rattle” is displayed as an indication to urge attention to the back lower right effect unit 3600, and the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern A 16-round jackpot game is executed and the probability is 50%, and if the stage ball 3610 released from the lower right stage rendering unit 3600 is not striped, a two-round jackpot game is played. When it is executed, a message indicating that the probability is 50% is displayed (see FIG. 79).

  At this time, the lighting effect being performed on the game area is darkened so as to stand out so that the place where the player should watch is conspicuous, and the back lower right effect unit 3600 is turned on with bright illumination. . In particular, at this point in time, the progress of the game is still being forcibly stopped, so that both the trend of the game balls launched toward the game area and the acting role, as in conventional pachinko machines. There is no need to watch. Accordingly, the player pays attention to whether or not the jackpot game to be played is a jackpot game (16R jackpot game) in which the prize ball amount is larger than the prize ball amount of 9R, which is the expected value of the prize ball amount. In addition, the player's gaze can be transferred to the lower right lower stage production unit 3600 very naturally without paying attention to the trend of the game ball.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the condition device is activated and the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is a big hit. The game content (game technique) until the jackpot game is executed when the game is stopped by forcibly stopping the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time despite the display of the image indicating that Explanation is made (that is, it can be said that the game technique is forcibly explained by providing an interval period). In other words, the player can reliably select the jackpot game mode so that the jackpot game mode against the player's will is not executed. Therefore, rather than based on the idea of explaining the gaming technique during the interval period, in order to explain the gaming technique, it is necessary to reset the game until then (until the lottery result is a big win) This is based on the idea of providing

  Furthermore, even if the game ball passes through the gate 2575 against the player's will as a result of the player accidentally or excessively firing the game ball after the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed, It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed in a manner contrary to the will of the player. Specifically, regardless of whether the player passes the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R as a result of accidentally or excessively launching the game ball, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580 is invalidated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed in a manner contrary to the will of the player.

  In other words, after the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed, it is assumed that the player has fired a game ball to pass either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R by his / her own intention. However, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated, and the progress to the big hit game remains stopped. Even if the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is validated, the jackpot game does not proceed unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. The jackpot game can be started by the player's intention. Furthermore, the type of jackpot game can be selected according to the player's intention. At this time, the progress of the game is stopped, and the lighting effect is performed so that the sorting unit 2550 and the back lower right effect unit 3600 stand out, so that the player can play the game balls launched toward the game area. It is not necessary to pay attention to the trend, and attention can be paid to the effect ball emitted from the lower right effect unit 3600.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by allowing the player to select the type of jackpot game according to the timing at which the game ball is fired, there is a possibility that a jackpot game contrary to the player's will be executed. We try to eliminate as much as possible. For example, it is possible to select the type of jackpot game by categorizing left-handed and right-handed, but especially the game ball immediately after launch, even though the game ball was fired with the intention of left-handed It may be right-handed or left-handed even though it has fired a game ball to make a right-hand shot. In this regard, by allowing the player to select the type of jackpot game depending on the timing at which the game ball is fired, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a jackpot game contrary to the player's intention is executed. Furthermore, since the image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed with a delay from the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched, the player has caused the player to fly and fire the game ball. Even so, it is possible to avoid the execution of a jackpot game of a type contrary to the will of the player, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, even after the jackpot image indicating that the jackpot is displayed, the explanation interval period effect timer before the conditional device is activated is timed up. Until then, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. Then, during the explanation interval effect in which the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated, the jackpot game to be started is started. Explanation of game contents (operation procedure) is displayed (see FIGS. 73 to 76). However, whether or not to explain the contents of the game for starting the jackpot game, whether the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a jackpot or the type of jackpot It is decided according to.

  Specifically, in the normal gaming state (the normal gaming state that is neither the probability variation state, the time shortening state, the probability variation short time state, or the jackpot gaming state), it was acquired based on the start winning to the first starting port 1502 When the lottery result for the second special random number acquired based on the first special random number or the start winning to the second starting port 1506 is a big hit, an explanation of the game content for starting the big hit game is displayed ( 73 to 76).

  However, the first special random number acquired based on the start winning to the first start port 1502 or the start to the second start port 1506 in any of the gaming state among the probability variation state, the time shortening state, and the probability variation short time state When the lottery result for the second special random number acquired based on the winning is a big win (that is, when so-called consecutive change), for example, the contents of the game for starting the big win game as shown in FIGS. The explanation is not displayed, and characters such as “Aim for the one you like ♪” and voice output are displayed as shown in FIG. 76, and the harassment type is 12R, 50% with a probability of 50%. A picture indicating that the probability is 6R and a picture indicating that the pounding type is 16R with a probability of 50% and 2R with a probability of 50% are displayed.

  As a result, when the jackpot game is executed again in the gaming state (probability variation state, time shortening state, probability change short state) shortly after the jackpot game is executed, as shown in FIGS. Since the explanation of the game content until the big hit game is started is not displayed, it is possible to avoid having to repeatedly view the same explanation display.

  Even if the lottery result in the normal gaming state is a big hit, if the big hit type flag-on in step S6317 is a specific type of big hit flag, the same as when the lottery result in the probability variation state or the like is a big hit Furthermore, description of the game content for starting the jackpot game is not performed. When the jackpot type flag ON in step S6317 is a specific type jackpot flag, the jackpot game in a specific mode (this embodiment), regardless of which of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R is allowed to pass the game ball This is because a 16-round jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, even if a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R after the image indicating that it is a big hit, the length of a period during which the game ball is invalidated is also in the gaming state. Depending on it.

  Specifically, when the condition device is activated in a normal gaming state (a normal gaming state that is neither a probability variation state, a time shortening state, a probability variation short time state, or a jackpot gaming state), a game until the jackpot game is started While the description of the contents is displayed, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. However, if the condition device is activated in any of the probability variation state, the time shortening state, and the probability variation short state game state, the player is mistakenly or gained momentum after the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed. A predetermined period of time (for example, in FIG. 76) that can prevent the fired game ball from being detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R and executing a jackpot game of a type contrary to the player's will. The display of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalid only while the characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” and voice output are performed as shown. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the progress of the game is unnecessarily stopped and the interest is lowered.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game balls are distributed to either the route on the distribution detection sensor 2580L side or the route on the distribution detection sensor 2580R side by the distribution unit 2550, which route In order to be able to grasp for a long time whether or not the game ball is distributed, the distribution suggestion member 2590 on the side where the game ball is distributed is lit at least until the big hit game is completed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a player can distribute a game ball that has been shot into the game area by his / her own operation to a distribution destination according to his / her intention. Yes. In other words, either the harassment type or the pounding type can be selected according to the player's intention.

  When the harassment type is selected, a 12-round jackpot game and a 6-round jackpot game are executed with a probability of 50%. When the pounding type is selected, a rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is executed.

  In the rattle lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600, as described above, if the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, the jackpot game mode is a 16-round jackpot game. Is executed. On the other hand, if the effect ball 3610 released from the back lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, a jackpot game of two rounds is executed.

  Here, when the player selects the pounding type, that is, when the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the player can detect the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. When the game ball is fired in the game, the mode of the jackpot game is based on whether the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, whether the game is a 2-round jackpot game or a 16-round jackpot game. It is decided by a lottery.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a two-round jackpot game or a 16-round jackpot is achieved by an internal lottery performed based on the game ball detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. Although it is decided whether to play a game, in the rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600, based on the result of the rattle lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600, It looks as if it is decided whether to make a 16-round jackpot game.

  In detail, even if the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big win, as described above, the big win game is not started with this alone, and if the player selects the pounding type, for example, A rattle lottery effect (external lottery effect) using the lower effect unit 3600 is executed. The rattle lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600 is actually 16 rounds as a result of an internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. When the game is determined to be a big hit game, a striped effect ball 3610 is emitted, and when it is determined to be a two round jackpot game, a non-striped effect ball 3610 is released.

  However, when viewed from the player, when the player selects the pounding type, a rattle lottery using the lower right effect unit 3600 is performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. The jackpot game is shown to be executed in the jackpot game mode determined by the rattle lottery. In particular, the aspect of the jackpot game determined by the internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R is displayed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. In this display, after the production ball 3160 is released from the lower right production unit 3600, the time required for the player to check whether the produced production ball 3610 is striped or non-striped. Not done until after.

  That is, after the effect ball 3160 is released from the back lower right effect unit 3600, the mode of jackpot game is displayed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the pattern of the released effect ball 3160. It is trying to. Accordingly, the mode of the jackpot game is originally determined by an internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, but the back right lower stage effect unit 3600 is used. It becomes possible to perform the lottery effect as if it was determined based on the result of the rattle lottery (the rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600 was detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. Based on). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600, which is different from the performance of a finished race like a conventional pachinko machine, for example. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery effect is executed as if the jackpot game mode is determined by the rattle lottery effect using the back right lower stage production unit 3600. Is not limited to the degree of the number of prize balls (for example, the number of rounds) that a player can win in the jackpot game, but whether or not the game state after the jackpot game is executed is set to a high probability state ( It is a concept including whether it is a normal jackpot or a probable jackpot.

  In this way, by performing the lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600, it can be shown to the player as if the mode of the jackpot game is determined based on the external lottery result, A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, when the lottery effect is performed as if the mode of the jackpot game is determined based on such an external lottery result, for example, if the back lower right effect unit 3600 malfunctions, the player will be awakened. There is a fear. In this respect, the back right lower stage production unit 3600 of the present embodiment is configured so as not to cause such a malfunction as described above, so that the jackpot game is based on an external lottery result without causing the player to wake up. It is possible to execute a lottery effect as if the mode of the item is determined.

  Next, with regard to the rattle effect in which the player is informed of the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery by performing the rattle lottery using the back lower right effect unit 3600, referring to FIGS. explain. The rattle lottery (rattle effect) using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is actually based on the result of the internal special lottery, but when viewed from the player's viewpoint, the result of the rattle lottery This is based on the idea of making it appear as if the stop mode of the symbols displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is determined. FIG. 80 to FIG. 83 are diagrams showing aspects of display effects performed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the special lottery.

  As described above, the first special random number is acquired based on the start winning at the first start port 1502, and the second special random number is acquired based on the start winning at the second start port 1506. Then, a special lottery is performed using these special random numbers, and a predetermined display effect is performed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the special lottery.

  First, when reaching the reach effect in the display effect based on the result of the special lottery, a plurality of patterns including the pattern of the lucky ticket are displayed (see FIG. 80A). Then, any one picture is selected from the plurality of pictures displayed in this way. In the present embodiment, one picture is selected, but it goes without saying that the picture is not limited to this.

  When one of the patterns is selected from the plurality of patterns, the selected pattern is displayed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 80B). In FIG. 80B, an image indicating that a lucky ticket has been selected is displayed. When the lucky ticket is selected in this way, the player uses the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to clearly indicate to the player that the right to perform the rattle lottery using the back lower right effect unit 3600 has been granted. Is displayed on the substantially entire area of the display screen (see FIG. 81 (A)) and output as a sound.

  When the character of “rattle chance” is displayed and voice output is made on almost the entire display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the rattle effect and the content of profit given to the player corresponding to this result Is displayed (FIG. 81 (B)). The result of the rattle production and the content of the profit given to the player corresponding to this result are specifically shown in FIG. 81 (B), when the rattle lottery is performed. If the production ball 3610 released from 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, a “Tropical Travel Invitation” is presented, and if the production ball 3610 released from the back lower right production unit 3600 is not a stripe pattern, the “pocket” “Tissue” is displayed as a gift, and “Tropical Travel Invitation” and “Pocket Tissue” both indicate that the number of remaining prizes is three. Thereby, the player can grasp that the probability of winning the “Tropical Trip Invitation” is 50%. Here, when comparing “Tropical Travel Invitation” and “Pocket Tissue”, it can be commonly thought of that “Tropical Travel Invitation” is more advantageous for the player. For example, if the result of the rattle lottery is “Tropical Travel Invitation”, the player will be shown that the probability variation function will be activated, and if the result of the rattle lottery is “Pocket Tissue”, the probability variation function The player may be shown to be a normal jackpot that does not work.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (B), when the rattle lottery is performed, if the production ball 3610 released from the lower right production unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, a “Tropical Trip Invitation” is presented. After the image indicating that “Pocket Tissue” is presented if the production ball 3610 released from the lower right production unit 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, the player is watching the lower right production Guidance display for guiding to the effect unit 3600 is performed (see FIG. 82A). At this time, in order to highlight the place where the player should pay attention, the lighting effect being performed on the game area is darkened so as to be plain, and the back lower right effect unit 3600 is lit brightly. In addition, the back lower right effect unit 3600 rotates as if a rattle lottery is being performed, and a display effect as if the rattle lottery device is rotating is displayed in order to emphasize this. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 1900.

  Then, when the striped effect ball is released to the outside from the lower right effect unit 3600, an image indicating that the “Tropical Trip Invitation” has been hit is displayed on the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. (See FIG. 82B). After that, as an image indicating that the game state is controlled to the high probability gaming state, the characters “Tropical mode entry!” Are displayed in a large size over substantially the entire display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 83). Sound is output. Thereby, the player can grasp that the gaming state after the jackpot game is ended is controlled to the high probability gaming state. In this way, the result of the special lottery is informed by the rattle effect by the lower right effect unit 3600.

  In this embodiment, the rattle lottery effect is performed only when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R and becomes a pounding type. However, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L Even when it becomes, a similar effect may be performed.

  By the way, in the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, as in the conventional pachinko machine, the symbols (decorative symbols) are variably displayed in a variation pattern based on the result of the special lottery, and the player has stopped this symbol. The result of the special lottery can be grasped by the display mode that is sometimes displayed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to this, if the effect ball 3610 released from the back lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, it is controlled to a high probability gaming state, and the lower right effect unit If the effect ball 3610 released from 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, the normal gaming state is controlled (more specifically, the previous gaming state is continued). That is, whether or not it is controlled to the high probability gaming state is determined based on the special lottery, but by showing the player the rattle lottery using the back lower right effect unit 3600, It is possible to make the player think as if the result is reflected in the gaming state. In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the result of the special lottery by looking at the mode when the variation of the decorative symbol based on the result of the special lottery is stopped. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation of the decorative pattern based on the result of the special lottery and the rattle lottery using the lower right rendering unit 3600 are not performed in parallel. After the production ball 3610 is released from the lower right production unit 3600 to the outside, the variation of the decorative design is stopped. That is, the effect of the rattle lottery is made by causing the effect ball 3610 to be released to the outside from the back lower right effect unit 3600 before the decoration symbol is stopped, even though the decorative symbol is still fluctuating. Based on the above, it is shown as if the decorative pattern in the changing state is stopped. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the rattle production using the back lower right production unit 3600 is clearly different from the production of the finished race like a conventional pachinko machine. It becomes possible to give interest to the production using the unit 3600. Further, it is more preferable to show as if a display effect by a character or the like displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed based on the result of the rattle lottery. For example, if it is a gaming machine in which the result of the special lottery is shown to the player not only by the mode when the decorative symbol is stopped, but also by the mode of display effect by the character displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, By changing the aspect of the display effect after the effect ball 3610 is released to the outside from the lower right effect unit 3600, it can appear as if the display effect is being performed based on the result of the rattle lottery. It becomes possible.

  Note that the result of the special lottery notified by the rattle production by the back lower right production unit 3600 is not limited to the jackpot type (whether or not it is controlled to the high probability gaming state), for example, the winning result (the jackpot game is executed) Or not). In this case, even though the decorative symbol has fluctuated and the result of the special lottery has not been displayed yet, the result of the special lottery is displayed by stopping this decorative symbol, and the lower right effect is produced. The effect ball 3610 is released from the unit 3600 to the outside, and whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit is notified according to the released effect ball 3610.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the rotating cylinder 3608 is used in the rotating cylinder 3608 having the accommodating recess 3608a that can accommodate the effect ball 3610 of the lower right effect unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000. Since the gap between the outer periphery of the rotating cylinder 3608 and the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602 is within the range of 1/5 to 1/3 of the diameter of the effect ball 3610, the effect ball 3610 is When the rotary cylinder 3608 is rotated while being accommodated in the accommodating recess 3608a, the effect ball 3610 enters the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 whose outer peripheral side is closed by the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602. However, the side notch 361 in the effect ball 3610 is accompanied by the rotation of the rotary cylinder 3608. When the circumferential end of the housing recess 3608a comes into contact with the portion protruding from the housing recess 3608a to the side of the housing recess 3608a, the effect ball 3610 can be returned from the side notch 3612c into the housing recess 3608a, and the discharge flap 3612 side It is possible to prevent the production ball 3610 from being caught between the cylindrical portion 3602b and the rotating cylinder 3608 by the direction notch portion 3612c, to prevent occurrence of a malfunction, and to play a game by interrupting the game. It is possible to entertain the game by avoiding a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In the lower right production unit 3600, the production sphere 3610 is emitted from the discharge port 3630b formed on the outer periphery of the lower right rotation decoration body 3630 that can rotate around the axial center extending in the front-rear direction. Since the player can hardly see the release port 3630b from which the production ball 3610 is released, the production of the production ball can be clearly different from the release of the production ball in the conventional pachinko machine. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

  Further, the rotating cylinder 3608 is arranged in a direction in which the housing recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 in the back lower right rendering unit 3600 coincides with the discharge portion 3602c (side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612) of the back lower unit base 3602 from above. The effect ball 3610 that has entered (partially) the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 from inside the accommodation recess 3608a by the rotation of the rotation cylinder 3608 is the rotation cylinder 3608 (accommodation recess 3608a). And the lower end of the side notch 3612c comes into contact with the effect ball 3610 before the end of the upper side in the circumferential direction of the receiving recess 3608a. The production ball 3610 is in the housing recess 3608a until the part comes into contact with the upper side The effect ball 3610 can be returned into the accommodation recess 3608a by the upper end in the circumferential direction of the accommodation recess 3608a that is in contact with the effect sphere 3610 due to the gravity acting on the effect sphere 3610, and there is a side notch. It is possible to reliably prevent the effect ball 3610 from being sandwiched between the 3612c and the housing recess 3680a and hindering the rotation of the rotary cylinder 3608. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to a problem caused by the rotation of the rotating cylinder 3608 being inhibited, and the player can surely enjoy the effect by the effect ball 3610. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the discharge part 3602c of the lower right lower unit base 3602 in the lower right lower effect unit 3600, that is, the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotation decorative body 3630, the rotary cylinder 3608 and the discharge flap 3612 are discharged. Are reciprocally rotated a plurality of times within a predetermined angle range, and by vibrating the receiving recess 3608a and the side notch 3612c, the dimensional error and positioning error are eliminated and the receiving recess 3608a The production ball 3610 can be released from the discharge part 3602c of the lower right lower unit base 3602, and the production by the production ball 3610 can be surely performed, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized. .

  In addition, when the effect ball 3610 is ejected from the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 in the back lower right effect unit 3600, the ball receiving member 3654 is tilted a plurality of times, and therefore the effect ball 3610 from the ball receiving portion 3654b. Can be reliably discharged toward the collection passage 3652b, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 on which the game ball rolls is ahead of the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The depth of the stage 2510 in the front-rear direction can be increased compared to a conventional pachinko machine that extends to substantially the same position as the front end of 1110A and has the front end substantially the same position as the front surface of the game panel 1200. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled in various states by the wide stage 2510, and by making the game ball perform various movements on the stage 2510, it prevents the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and makes it hard to get tired. And the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball that rolls on the stage 2510. Against it is possible to suppress that the interest is reduced.

  In addition, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 in which the game ball can roll is extended to substantially the same position as the front end of the front component member 1110A that defines the outer periphery of the game area 1100 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200. Since the front end of the third stage 2513 is substantially at the same position as the front end of the game area 1100, when the game ball rolls near the front end of the third stage 2513, the stage in the conventional pachinko machine It is possible to roll the game ball at a position as close to the player as possible as compared to the game ball rolling on the top, making it easier to see the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 and making the movement of the game ball more Can entertain.

  Further, the rear end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is positioned behind the rear surface of the game panel 1200, and the game ball is positioned on the stage 2510 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200 and the game. It is possible to roll between the position behind the rear surface of the panel 1200 and the depth in the front-rear direction of the stage 2510 can be made as wide as possible. It can be rolled in a state, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from becoming monotonous by making various movements of the game ball on the stage 2510. Pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the movement of a game ball that rolls over 2510 and that can prevent the interest in games from deteriorating. It can be reliably implemented.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 includes the peripheral wall portion 2503 protruding forward, the stage 2510 arranged in the frame with the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500 being arranged in the frame, the production units 3200, 3400, 3600, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, etc. can be made to stand out, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  Further, when a game ball enters the first chance inlet 2516 and the second chance inlet 2517 opened on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, from the chance outlet 2518 opened just above the first start opening 2101. Since the game ball is about to be released and the game ball can be received into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 with a high probability, the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 is allowed to enter the first chance entrance 2516. Alternatively, the player can be thrilled by whether or not he / she enters the second chance entrance 2517, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 to reduce the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game machine 1100 is driven into the game area 1100 with the aim of the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 of the attacker units 2100A and 2100B arranged below the center accessory 2500. Even if the game ball that has been placed abuts against the obstacle nail below the center accessory 2500 and jumps upward, the game ball bounced by the third stage 2513 bounces downward and enters the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500. Since the intrusion is prevented, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 side and causing a malfunction, and avoiding the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the malfunction. Can be made. Further, the third stage 2513 for preventing the invasion of the game ball is positioned from the position between the second stage 2512 and the fourth stage 2514 formed on the lower side of the center accessory 2500 from the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). Since the third stage 2513 moves away from the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500, the third stage 2513 can be made relatively inconspicuous and the third stage 2513 extends forward. 2513 can prevent the decoration of other decorations and the like from being obstructed, and the vertical positional relationship between the third stage 2513 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is farther than a conventional pachinko machine. The light emitted from the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and reflected from the upper surface of the third stage 2513 cannot easily reach the player's eyes. It can be, to prevent the visible glowing top surface of the third stage 2513 can be prevented from appearance of pachinko machine 1 is deteriorated.

  In addition, the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513 that prevents the invasion of game balls, and abuts against obstacle nails planted below the center accessory 2500. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball that has bounced upward from being placed on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513, the game ball does not pass through the warp entrance 2504 (regular route). It is possible to prevent the player from being supplied onto the stage 2510 and to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by supplying the game ball onto the stage 2510 without passing through the regular route. The game with this pachinko machine 1 can be continued.

  Further, since the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 are arranged above the third stage 2513 that prevents the game ball from entering, the first stage 2511 is not blocked by the third stage 2513. The game balls rolling on the second stage 2512 can be seen from the player side to make the game balls easy to see, and the game balls rolling on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513 It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by making the movement entertaining.

  Furthermore, a stage 2510 is provided that allows the game ball to be released into the game area 1100 at a position immediately above the first start port 2101, and the game ball is played from the position immediately above the first start port 2101 in the stage 2510. When released into 1100, the game balls are accepted to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 with a high probability, so that the game balls supplied onto the stage 2510 are discharged from directly above the first start port 2101. The player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the game can be expected to be accepted into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and roll on the stage 2510. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball to be played, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Further, since the game ball can be discharged from the stage 2510 directly into the game area 1100 directly above the first start port 2101, the game ball aimed at the warp inlet 2504 is supplied so that the game ball is supplied onto the stage 2510. The player can actively perform the driving operation, can entertain the game ball, and the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 can be seen well, and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  When a game ball enters the warp inlet 2504 of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the first stage 2511 and then released to the second stage 2512. Since it is supplied to the fourth stage 2514 and the fifth stage 2515 through the third stage 2513 to be prevented and discharged from the fifth stage 2515 into the game area 1100, the first stage 2511 to the fifth stage 2515. By the stage 2510 having the above, it is possible to make the player enjoy a variety of rolling of the game balls, and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. In addition, as described above, the stage 2510 is multi-staged, and the rolling time of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 becomes long. It is possible to lengthen the game ball to be consumed at an early stage, and to make the player feel like it has been enjoyed for a long time. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since a third stage 2513 extending forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1200 is provided as a part of the stage 2510, the stage 2510 enters the warp inlet 2504 and enters the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) from the warp outlet 2505. The game ball supplied to) rolls in the left-right direction on the third stage 2513, so that the game ball can roll in front of the front of the game panel 1200 (game panel 1210). The game ball can be rolled in the left-right direction on the side closer to the player than the machine. Accordingly, the stage 2510 can have an impression different from that of the conventional pachinko machine for the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be drawn to attract the player's interest. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball rolling from the side of the player, and to suppress the interest in the game from deteriorating by making the game ball move.

  In addition, a first chance entrance 2516 and a second chance entrance 2517 into which game balls can enter are formed in the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, and the first start is performed below the fifth stage 2515. A chance exit 2518 is formed immediately above the mouth 2101 to release the game balls that have entered the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 into the game area 1100, and roll on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512. Whether or not a moving game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517 can excite and thrill the player, increasing the player's expectation for the game and reducing the interest in the game. , And the game ball is the first chance 2516 and the second chance The time from entering the mouth 2517 until the game ball is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2518 until the game ball rolls from the first stage 2511 to the fifth stage 2515 and is released into the game area 1100. Since the game ball can be released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 in a shorter time than the time, the multistage stage 2510 increases the time that the game ball stays on the stage 2510, depending on the player. It can be avoided that the tempo of the game slows down and the interest is lowered, and it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by entertaining the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back disposed below the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 between the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. A back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 and a pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420 each having a predetermined decoration are supported on the back bottom unit base 3402 of the back bottom rendering unit 3400 in the unit 3000 so as to be movable up and down and rotatable. A back lower front middle decorative body 3506 is supported so as to be movable up and down through a back lower front base 3502 attached to the front side of the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420. In a normal state, the back bottom middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 are viewed from the front of the panel plate 1210. Since it is located outside the mouth portion 1215 (including the lower side), the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 are arranged from the player side. It is hard to see. When the player hits the game ball into the game area 1100 to change the game state, the back and bottom rear middle decorative body 3450 rises to the inside of the front view opening 1215 according to the changed game state. The pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420 rotate inward of the front view opening 1215 and the tips come into contact with each other, the back bottom front decorative body 3506 rises to the inside of the front view opening 1215, Since the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 move to the inside of the front view opening 1215 in an appropriate combination, various movable effects can be achieved. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by various effects, and to prevent the player from having fun and reducing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 are raised to the inside of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 at the substantially center in the left-right direction, and a pair of back bottom rear side decorations Since the body 3420 is rotated to the inside of the opening 1215 in the front view so as to surround the outer periphery of the back and middle back decorative body 3450, for example, the back and back back middle decorative body 3450 is raised into the opening 1215. When the pair of lower back and rear side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated into the opening 1215 afterward, the player can be surprised by first raising the rear lower and rear inner decorative bodies 3450 to appear. At the same time, the player's interest can be attracted to the back-under-back middle decorative body 3450, and the pair of back-under-back side-side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated in a state in which the player pays attention to the back-bottom back-back middle decorative body 3450. Let By enclosing the outer periphery of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 with the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420, the back lower back inner decorative body 3450 can be seen to be greatly deformed, and the player is further surprised and enjoyed. And can make the player think that there may be something good by seeing (appearing) the large back bottom middle decorative body 3450 and the back bottom rear side decorative body 3420. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated from the outside to the inside of the front-view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210, and compared with the case where they are slid linearly. Since the direction of the back lower back side decorative body 3420 is changed by moving, the appearance of the back lower back side decorative body 3420 changes during the rotation. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the movement of the back lower side decorative body 3420 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420 are arranged such that the front surface thereof is located behind the front surface of the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450, and the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back bottom back decorative bodies 3450 are arranged. When the side decorative body 3420 is moved to the inside of the front opening 1215 and appears, the front surface of the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 surrounding the outer periphery of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 Since it is located on the rear side of the front surface of the middle decorative body 3450, a depth feeling is given to the decoration formed by the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of lower back rear side decorative bodies 3420, thereby making it more three-dimensional. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that enhances decorativeness (designability) and strongly attracts the player's interest can be obtained. In addition, the front surface of the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 surrounding the outer periphery of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 is positioned behind the front surface of the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450, and When the decorative body 3450 and the pair of rear back side decorative bodies 3420 appear, the outer side of the center is farther from the player side, so that it is possible to provide a spacious decoration with a sense of perspective. Can be surprised, and even if the inside of the front view opening 1215 is blocked by the appearance of the rear back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420, the player can be surprised. It is possible to prevent a feeling of pressure from being exerted, and it is possible to entertain the decorations of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back lower back rear side decorative bodies 3420 to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

  Further, as described above, since the front surface of the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 is positioned rearward of the front surface of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the decoration can be given a stereoscopic effect. Even if the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the lower back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 is reduced, the three-dimensional decoration can be sufficiently exhibited. Since the thickness of 3450 and the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 can be reduced, the space in the front-rear direction required for the installation of the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 is possible. It is possible to reduce the size of the decorative body relatively, and it is possible to secure a space for other decorative bodies relatively, and to make the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the back lower rear side decorative body 3420, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506, etc. Or larger It can be, can be a difficult pachinko machine 1 tired Te strongly attracted the attention of more players.

  Further, the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420, the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506, etc. Since the front side decorative board 3536 and the back lower front middle decorative board 3546 are provided, the back lower rear side decorative board 3426, the back lower rear middle decorative board 3456, and the back lower front side decorative board 3536 provided respectively. Further, by appropriately decorating the back / rear / rear middle decorative body 3450 and the like by the front / rear front / rear middle decorative board 3546, the appearance of the back / rear / rear middle decorative body 3450 and the like can be changed in various ways. A variety of effects can be presented to the player by combining the light emitting decorations of the decorative body 3450, the pair of back and bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506. Can be interest in the user of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the panel board 1210 is provided with a hook-shaped pointer member 3458 that rotates on the front surface of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 (decorative body main body 3454) that moves up and down between the inside and the lower side of the front opening 1215. Therefore, by rotating the pointer member 3458 after being raised to the inside of the opening portion 1215 when viewed from the front, not only the appearance of the decoration body 3454 but also the rotation of the pointer member 3458 can be enjoyed, and a variety of players can be enjoyed. It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by presenting the production, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced, and it is possible to make the hook-shaped pointer member 3458 look like a clock hand, By rotating the pointer member 3458, it is possible to make the player think that time is approaching, and to make it throbbing and throbbing. Interest can be inhibited from reduction against.

  In addition, since the pointer member 3458 in the back-under-rear middle decorative body 3450 can be illusioned like a clock hand, the pointer member 3458 has a predetermined rotational position (for example, the position where the pointer member 3458 has started to rotate and the pointer member 3458 is substantially vertical). , The position of the specific decoration provided on the decorative body main body 3454 on the rear side of the pointer member 3458, etc., so that at least the pointer member 3458 is predetermined. Until the rotation position is reached, the player's interest can be attracted to the pointer member 3458 (the back-rear middle decorative body 3450), and the player is less tired and the interest in the game is reduced. Can do.

  Further, the back bottom front unit 3500 has a three-dimensionally shaped front bottom front middle decorative body 3506 and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 extending outward from the left and right sides, respectively, and the base end side is rotatable. And a pair of lower back front side decorative bodies 3530 that rotate between a position where the tip side is lower than the base end side and a raised position as the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 is raised and lowered. When the lower back front middle decorative body 3506 is lifted inward from the lower side of the opening 1215 in the front view, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 appears and at the same time the left and right sides of the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 are arranged. The pair of back-under-front side decorative bodies 3530 rotate to a position where the distal end side is higher than the base end side, so that a pair of back-bottom front sides extending diagonally upward and leftward from the back-bottom front-inside decorative body 3506 Decorative body 3530 makes the entire decorative body large It is possible to make it look like it has become, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly to the lower back front unit 3500, and the impression that it spreads to the player due to the movable state of the lower back front unit 3500 It is possible to increase the player's sense of excitement and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, a back / rear / rear middle decorative body 3450, a pair of back / rear / rear side decorative bodies 3420, a back / rear front / rear middle decorative body 3506, and the like are disposed on the front side of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, respectively. When the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 are moved from the outside of the front view opening 1215 to the inside, respectively, Since it is positioned (appears) on the front side of the side liquid crystal display device 1900, the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 in which the effect image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 has appeared, and a pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 and the lower back front middle decorative body 3506, etc., can change the appearance of the displayed effect image and the appearance of the ornament that has appeared, and can present more various effects to the player. Interest in the game and hardly come can be suppressed.

  Further, since the decorative bodies such as the back-bottom rear middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back-bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back-bottom front middle decorative body 3506 move (appear) to the front surface of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the effect image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is blocked by the decorative body, the player can easily notice the movement of each decorative body, and the inside of the front-view opening 1215 It is possible to entertain the movement by paying attention to the decorative body moving to the point, and it can make the player think that there is something good with the advent of the decorative body, raising the expectation for the game It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, since each of the decorative bodies such as the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420, and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 can be moved to the front surface of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The effect image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be associated with the movement of each decorative body, and the collaboration effect that combines the image effect by the effect image and the movable effect by the movement of the decorative body can be achieved. It can be performed, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained with more various effects.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second slide base 3248 of the back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 moves up and down according to the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) attached to the front surface of the second slide base 3248 also moves and the entire effect image can be moved, so that the effect image is displayed. A strong impact can be given to a player who has a preconception that the display device is fixed and does not move, and the player's interest is expressed in the effect image (second liquid crystal display device 3252). The effect image can be enjoyed by attracting, and the effect image can be displayed by displaying the effect image according to the movement of the second elevating decorative body 3250. Do effect can be presented to the player, and interest in the game of the player to hardly tired effect can be suppressed.

  Further, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the front surface of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100, and the effect image displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decoration 3250) is blocked, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second liquid crystal display device 3252. And the effect image displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can prevent the player from having fun and reduce the interest in the game, and the effect image can be displayed on the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252. Therefore, the movement of the second elevating decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) does not shift from the effect image, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 The effect images of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the gimmick board side can be displayed in good condition, and the entertainment of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) and the effect images of each are reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 are separated, the second slide base 3248 is fixed so that the fixing piece 3248a is inserted into the fixing groove 3250a of the second elevating decorative body 3250. The slide base 3248 and the second elevating decoration body 3250 are moved relative to one side in the vertical direction to insert the fixing piece 3248a into the fixing groove 3250a, and the second elevating decoration is inserted into the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. By elastically locking the locking claw 3250c of the body 3250, the fixed piece 3248a is prevented from being detached from the fixed groove 3250a, and the second elevating decorative body 3250 ( The second liquid crystal display device 3252) is attached. On the other hand, in a state where the second elevating decorative body 3250 is attached to the second slide base 3248, the engaging claw 3250c of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is elastically deformed to engage with the engaging hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. After releasing the stop, the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 are moved relative to each other in the vertical direction to fix the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 to the fixing groove of the second elevating decorative body 3250. The second elevating decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) is removed from the second slide base 3248 by removing it from the inside of the 3250a, and the second elevating decorative body 3250 is securely attached to the second slide base 3248. Can be detachably attached to. Further, the locking claw 3250c of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is elastically engaged with the engaging hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248, so that the fixed piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 becomes the second elevating decorative body. The second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be easily detached by the elastic deformation of the locking claw 3250c. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252 of the second elevating decorative body 3250, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed, so that maintenance such as replacement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be performed. It can be easily performed, and the time that the game is interrupted by maintenance can be shortened as much as possible, and the game is resumed before the player feels irritated by the interruption, and the player's interest in the game It is possible to suppress the decrease, and various effects using the effect image by the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be performed without problems, and the movement of the second elevating decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252). It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which can suppress that a player's interest falls by delighting a player with an effect image.

  Further, since the second elevating decorative body 3250 is detachably attached to the second slide base 3248, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and the cost for manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 increases. Since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed when the pachinko machine 1 is discarded, the waste separation work can be easily performed, and the environment-friendly pachinko machine 1 It can be.

  In addition, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the second slide base 3248 located on the outside of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 as a front view. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 is attached so as to extend to the front side of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, when the second slide base 3248 is moved, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is likely to vibrate. However, as described above, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably attached to the moving base. Even if a malfunction occurs in the device 3252, it can be dealt with immediately, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be maintained in a good state. Therefore, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 without any problem, and it is possible to prevent the player from having fun and reducing the interest in the game.

  Further, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is a display device separate from the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, even if the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved outside the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect image is displayed. The display pattern can be displayed, and the production pattern by the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made more diverse. It is not necessary to provide the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, a separate second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the front of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the effect image of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 are moved. Since the position in the front-rear direction is different, it is possible to produce a deep effect with the two effect images, suppress the surprise of the player and reduce the interest, and attract the player's interest. In addition, it is possible to entertain the movement of each effect image and image display means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) that partitions the rear end of the game area 1100, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is disposed. Can prevent the flow of the game balls flowing in the game area 1100 from being obstructed, so that the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the movement of the game balls, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be used as the game panel 1200 ( Since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 has a problem, it can be removed from the second slide base 3248 through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200. The same effect as described above can be achieved by facilitating the maintenance of the two liquid crystal display device 3252. Rukoto can.

  Further, since the first elevating decorative body 3218 that can cover a part of the front surface of the second elevating decorative body 3250 and can move independently of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is provided, the first elevating decorative body 3218 is provided. By appropriately moving the decorative body 3218, it is possible to change the range in which the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be seen from the player side, and the player can be entertained by more various effects. It is possible to prevent the interest in games from being reduced by making it difficult to get bored.

  In addition, since the first elevating decorative body 3218 that moves on the front side of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 has a predetermined decoration, the first elevating decorative body 3218 decorates the player with the first elevating decorative body 3218. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) also enters the field of view and is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252 when the player pays attention to the first elevating decorative body 3218. The produced effect image can be shown reliably, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the discharge part 3602c of the cylindrical part 3602b and the side notch part 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 in the lower right lower unit base 3602 are not aligned. In the above, the game state is changed by the game ball being shot into the game area 1100 (in this case, the special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102). Accordingly, in the state where the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is rotated, the housing recess 3608a in which the effect ball 3610 of a specific mode that is released by rotating the rotating cylinder 3608 is housed is formed in the cylindrical portion of the back lower right unit base 3602. The rotation is stopped at a position substantially coincident with the discharge portion 3602c of 3602b. In this state, the production ball 3610 accommodated in the accommodation recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 is blocked by the peripheral wall portion 3612b of the discharge flap 3612 and cannot move to the cylindrical portion 3602b side. In this state, the rotation of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is stopped so that the discharge port 3630b of the lower right lower rotating decorative body 3630 substantially coincides with the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right lower unit base 3602. Subsequently, the discharge flap 3612 is rotated and stopped so that the side cutout portion 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 substantially coincides with the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b. As a result, the receiving recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608, the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612, the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right unit base 3602, and the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 are provided. The effect ball 3610 accommodated in the accommodation recess 3608a is released to the outside from the discharge port 3630b of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630, and the effect ball 3610 having a specific aspect corresponding to the gaming state is obtained. It can be discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630. The effect ball 3610 released from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is received by the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654, so that the released effect ball 3610 can be easily seen. The aspect (color or pattern) of the produced effect sphere 3610 can be reliably recognized. Then, when the ball receiving member 3654 is tilted by the back lower right collection solenoid 3660 while the effect ball 3610 is received by the ball receiving member 3654, the effect ball 3610 is moved from the ball receiving member 3654 to the collection passage 3652b of the collection unit cover 3652. It is discharged upward, rolls on the collection passage 3652b, and is guided to the collection port 3602f below the lower right rotating decorative body 3630. When the recovery port 3602f and the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 are substantially coincident with each other, the effect ball 3610 guided to the recovery port 3602f passes through the recovery port 3602f and the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 When the ball lift member 3670 is raised in this state, the effect ball 3610 housed in the opening 3670a is lifted. Thereafter, when the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 rises to a position that substantially matches the return port 3602e of the lower right unit base 3602, the movable bottom plate 3672 that forms the bottom of the opening 3670a in the ball lift member 3670 is The lower rotation decoration body 3630 side is inclined so as to be lowered, and the effect ball 3610 rolls from the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 to the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 side and returns through the return port 3602e. Become. In addition, in the rotating cylinder 3608 disposed inside the lower right rotating decorative body 3630, the plurality of receiving recesses 3608a are sized to accommodate only one effect ball 3610, and thus are released and emptied. The production ball 3610 that has returned to the housing recess 3608a enters and is returned to the same housing recess 3608a as before the discharge. Therefore, when the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 starts to rotate, the player can recognize that the production ball 3610 is released, and the lower right lower rotation rotating the player's interest. The player can be strongly attracted to the decorative body 3630, and the player is excited and excited by whether or not the production ball 3610 of a desired mode is discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630. It can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, since the effect ball 3610 having a different mode depending on the game state is discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630 in the back lower right effect unit 3600, the mode of the effect ball 3610 to be released ( The player may be informed of the possibility (for example, probability, reliability, etc.) of the arrival of an opportunity or an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player due to differences in colors, patterns, etc. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to enjoy the effect using the back lower right rotating decoration 3630 and the effect ball 3610, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game. Can do.

  Furthermore, the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is formed in a polygonal cylindrical shape with the front end side closed, and a discharge port 3630b through which the effect ball 3610 is discharged is formed at a predetermined position on the outer periphery. On the other hand, a rotary lottery machine (so-called rattle lottery machine) can be recalled from the appearance of the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630, and the player can see the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630 at a glance. It is possible to recognize that the rotating decoration body 3630 rotates, and the stage ball 3610 is released from the discharge port 3630b after the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 rotates according to the gaming state, so that the lottery is truly played. You can be surprised by the illusion of what is being done, and you can entertain with the effects of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and the production ball 3610 and have an interest in the game. It can be suppressed to below.

  In addition, the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right rotation decoration body 3630 by the lower right lower collection solenoid 3660 or the like is returned again to the inside of the lower right rotation decoration body 3630, so the effect ball 3610 is supplemented separately. Even without this, it is possible to automatically repeat the effect using the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and the effect ball 3610, and to continuously entertain the player and make it difficult to get bored, and the effect ball 3610. Is returned to the inside of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630, and the effect ball 3610 can be a separate medium from the game ball, so that the effect balls 3610 can have different aspects from each other, It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which shows the effect mentioned above reliably.

  In addition, since the housing recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 that houses the effect sphere 3610 is sized to accommodate only one effect sphere 3610, the effect sphere 3610 is moved from the discharge port 3630b of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630. When the next stage ball 3610 is released after being collected via the back lower right collection solenoid 3660, the ball lift member 3670, etc., the released stage ball 3610 is released inside the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630. When returning to the rotating cylinder 3608, the production ball 3610 is accommodated only in the empty accommodation recess 3608a, and the effect ball 3610 can be returned into the accommodation recess 3608a originally accommodated. Accordingly, each effect ball 3610 having a different aspect can be automatically returned and accommodated in the predetermined accommodation recess 3608a, so that when the effect ball 3610 of a specific aspect is released according to the gaming state, Rotating cylinder 3608 is rotated so that predetermined receiving recess 3608a coincides with discharge portion 3602c of cylindrical portion 3602b in back lower right unit base 3602 by making production balls 3610 correspond to receiving recesses 3608a. The effect ball 3610 having a desired mode can be released simply by stopping the operation, and the control related to the release of the effect ball 3610 can be simplified.

  Furthermore, unless the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 provided between the cylindrical portion 3602b and the rotary cylinder 3608 in the lower right lower unit base 3602 is substantially matched with the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b, The effect ball 3610 accommodated in the accommodation recess 3608a is prevented from passing through the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b, so that the effect ball 3610 cannot pass through without substantially matching the side notch 3612c and the discharge portion 3602c. In the state, it is possible to prevent the production ball 3610 from being released from the discharge port 3630b during the rotation of the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 inserted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3602b, and the production ball unintentionally. With the release of 3610, the production using the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 becomes incomplete, and the game Against it becomes possible to prevent from being given an uncomfortable feeling, the effect using the back lower right rotary decoration member 3630 amused ensures interest in the game can be suppressed. Further, as described above, the effect ball 3610 can be prevented from being released from the discharge port 3630b during the rotation of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630, and thus the effect ball 3610 is released in an unintended direction. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a trouble occurs and the game cannot be interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming uncomfortable and detracting from interest due to the interruption of the game. it can.

  Further, if the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right unit base 3602 and the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 do not substantially coincide with each other, the effect ball 3610 is not discharged to the outside through the discharge port 3630b. Therefore, the rotation position of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 from which the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is likely to correspond to the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b. The fixed direction of the effect ball 3610 emitted from the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 can be made constant, and the effect ball 3610 emitted from the lower right rotation decoration body 3630 can be reliably received by the ball receiving member. 3654 can be received.

  Further, when collecting the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right rotating decoration body 3630, the player receives the tilt of the ball receiving member 3654 and the effect ball 3610 rolling on the recovery path 3652b of the recovery unit cover 3652. This makes it possible to show not only the release of the production sphere 3610 but also the movement of the ball receiving member 3654 and the production sphere 3610, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. .

  Further, between the main body portion 3602a and the lower right lower unit case 3604 in the lower right unit base 3602, the ball lift member 3670 raises the rear lower right rotating decorative body 3630 to the rear side, and passes the return port 3602e to the front rear surface. Since the production ball 3610 is returned to the inside of the lower right rotation decoration body 3630, the player side shows that the production ball 3610 collected by the back lower right unit base 3602 is lifted up to the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630. It can be difficult to see or hide, and the player feels that the stage ball 3610 emitted from the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is not returned to the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 be able to. Accordingly, when the effect sphere 3610 is released from the lower right rotation decoration body 3630, it can be assumed that the number of the effect balls 3610 in the lower right rotation decoration body 3630 decreases. If the effect sphere 3610 emitted from the body 3630 is not the effect sphere 3610 of the desired aspect, it becomes possible to make an illusion that the probability that the effect sphere 3610 of the desired aspect is released becomes high, and the next right The expectation for the release of the production ball 3610 from the lower rotation decoration body 3630 can be further increased, and the entertainment using the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 and the production ball 3610 can be enjoyed to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the collection port 3602f in the lower right unit base 3602 is arranged directly below the return port 3602e, a mechanism for lifting the production ball 3610 from the collection port 3602f to the return port 3602e is held straight. For example, the mechanism for lifting the effect ball 3610 can be suppressed and recovered as compared with a case where the mechanism is lifted by rotation. The mechanism (collection mechanism) can be made compact and compact, and the collection mechanism can be miniaturized, so that the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and the like can be relatively enlarged, and the back lower right rotating decorative body. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that attracts the player's interest by making 3630 and the like stand out.

  Further, the back lower right unit base 3602 and the back lower right unit case 3604 are formed in a box shape, and the strength and rigidity can be increased, so that the rotating lower right rotating decorative body rotates. 3630, the rotation cylinder 3608, the discharge flap 3612, etc. can be securely held in a rotatable manner, and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and the like are prevented from rotating in an unstable manner, and the appearance during rotation is deteriorated. The discharge port 3630b, the side cutout 3612c, the housing recess 3608a and the like can be accurately matched with the discharge portion 3602c of the back lower right unit base 3602, so that the effect ball 3610 can be secured. Can be released.

  Further, when the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 does not coincide with the collection port 3602f of the lower right lower unit base 3602, the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right rotation decorative body 3630 is collected from the ball receiving member 3654. Even if it reaches the recovery port 3602f via 3652b, it is possible to prevent the effect ball 3610 from dropping through the recovery port 3602f by the front surface of the ball lift member 3670, so that the effect ball 3610 can be reliably recovered. Thus, the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 can be returned to, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball that has been shot into the game area 1100 is received in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102, after a predetermined lottery result is drawn, Depending on the lottery result, the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B can be accepted, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by accepting the gaming balls to the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B. It is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation and the game ball payout aiming at the first start port 2101, the second start port 2103, and the big winning ports 2103 </ b> A and 2103 </ b> B. In this pachinko machine 1, when a game ball is driven, the game ball is driven so that it circulates along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, that is, the game ball is hit with a strength higher than a predetermined level. (So-called right-handed), the game balls thrown into the upper part of the game area 1100 from the left side along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 flow to the right side on the opposite side along the inner circumference. Since the player enters the distribution space 2530 via the entry passage 2545, the game ball can be driven (entered) into the distribution space 2530 by a simple driving operation, and has entered the distribution space 2530. Since the game balls are discharged from the distribution space 2530 through the guide passage 2540 to the upper side of the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B, when the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B are acceptable, they are guided through the distribution space 2530. Through Has been a game ball release from 2540, winning opening 2103A with a high probability, it is possible to make accept to 2103B. As a result, when the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B become acceptable, a driving operation aiming at the distribution space 2530 can be performed so that the game balls are discharged from the guide passage 2540. In this distribution space 2530, a distribution valve 2551 is arranged, and when the game ball is distributed in either the left or right direction by the distribution valve 2551, and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580, A privilege (for example, the number of rounds for a “big hit” game) according to the direction distributed by the distribution valve 2551 is awarded. At this time, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 that are visible on the rear side through the transparent distribution space 2530 are rotated in the same direction as the game ball is distributed by the distribution valve 2551. Since it tilts, it is possible to clearly recognize the direction in which the game balls are distributed by the movement of the distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565. Therefore, it is clear by looking at the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 whether or not the distribution direction of the game balls by the distribution valve 2551 is a direction in which a desired privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to take the timing at which the game balls are distributed in a desired direction, and it is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the distribution detection sensor 2580 for detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movement of the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567, the distribution for detecting the game ball distributed by the distribution valve 2551. The distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 points to the detection sensor 2580, and the player can be surely recognized the distribution direction by the distribution valve 2551, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 are arranged on the rear side of the sorting space 2530, the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 are sorted. It is possible to prevent the game area 1100 including the space 2530 from being compressed and to prevent the game area 1100 from becoming narrow, and it is possible to distribute the game balls within the widest possible range. The movement of the original game ball of the machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the size of the movable movable decoration 2567 and the movable movable decoration 2565 can be increased without enlarging the game area 1100 or the moving range can be increased. The distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be made conspicuous and are distributed to the player by the distribution valve 2551. It is possible to achieve the same effects as described above reliably recognize to the direction.

  In addition, the rotation centers of the distribution valve 2551 and the distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 that distribute game balls by rotating are arranged substantially concentrically and rotate in the same direction. The way of movement of the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 is substantially the same, and even if a game ball is shot at a timing in accordance with the movement of the distribution movement lower decoration body 2567, the movement of the distribution valve 2551 is substantially reduced. At the same time, the game ball can be distributed in a desired direction by the distribution valve 2551, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, since the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 are rotated in the same direction, the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 can be seen as an integral feeling. It is possible to make the player feel as if the distributed movable decorative body 2567 distributes the game balls, so that the movement of the distributed movable decorative body 2567 and the distribution valve 2551 can be enjoyed. In addition, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the distribution of game balls by the distribution valve 2551 (distributed movable decorative body 2567) and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the front of the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567, the sorting movable upper decorative body 2565, and the sorting valve 2551 are respectively decorated with the same predetermined character, the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567 is provided. And the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be made more conspicuous, and the player can surely recognize the direction of distribution by the distribution valve 2551. In addition, since the predetermined character is formed by the decoration of the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565, and the distribution valve 2551, the movement of the predetermined character moves the distribution character. The movement of the movable lower decorative body 2567, the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565, and the distribution valve 2551 (character) can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Furthermore, by emitting the LED mounted on the sorting decoration board 2590, the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 can be illuminated and decorated from the rear side. The distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565 arranged on the rear side of the 2530 emit light and become brighter, so that the distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565 from the player side. Can be easily seen, and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be made more conspicuous, and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body can be arranged in the direction distributed by the distribution valve 2551. 2565 can be surely recognized. In addition, since the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 can be illuminated and decorated by the sorting decoration board 2590, for example, the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting moving lower decoration body 2567 and the optimal driving timing can be used. When the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 is decorated with light emission, it is possible to make it easy for the player to set the timing of the game ball, and to make the player more entertained and to reduce the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the slide of the sorting slider 2555 that reciprocally slides by the sorting drive motor 2558 is transmitted to the sorting valve 2551 through the connection spring 2556 and the like, and is movable through the rack gear 2555f and the first transmission gear 2562 and the like. Since the lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are transmitted, the distribution valve 2551, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are operated by one distribution drive motor 2558. Can be driven, the configuration related to each drive can be simplified, and the entire space related to the drive can be reduced. That is, since the space for driving the distribution valve 2551, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be reduced, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are relatively used. It is possible to widen the space such as the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565, and the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting can be moved. The movable upper decorative body 2565 is made conspicuous so that the player can surely recognize the direction of distribution by the distribution valve 2551, and it is easy to take the timing of the game ball and suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. can do.

  Further, when the game ball is hit with a strength of a predetermined level or more, the game ball hit from the left side along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to the upper part of the game area 1100 is directly changed to the right side on the opposite side along the inner circumference. , And will enter the distribution space 2530 via the distribution entry passage 2545, so that a game ball can be driven (entered) into the distribution space 2530 by a simple driving operation. In the game ball driving operation by the player, it is only necessary to place importance on the driving timing at which the game ball is distributed in a desired direction with respect to the distribution direction of the distribution valve 2530, and it is easy to distribute the game ball in the desired direction. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player first launches a game ball aiming at the first start port 2101 (second start port 2102), and the game ball launched into the game area 1100 A predetermined number of game balls are paid out upon receipt of the game balls received in the first start port 2101. When a special lottery result (big hit) that can be accepted by the big winning openings 2103A, 2103B is drawn, the big winning flag is turned ON, and game balls can be accepted by one of the big winning openings 2103A or the other big winning opening 2103B. A “big hit” game is started. However, it is not permitted to accept a game ball at one of the big winning openings 2103A or the other big winning opening 2103B immediately after a big hit, and first, an explanation interval effect is performed, and this explanation interval effect ends. The condition device is activated. In this state, when a game ball is hit with a strength of a predetermined level or more, the game ball hit on the upper part of the game area 1100 along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 from one side in the left-right direction remains as it is in the game area. It flows along the inner periphery of 1100 to the opposite side and enters the distribution space 2530. In this distribution space 2530, the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game balls in the left and right directions at a constant cycle irrespective of the game state that changes by driving the game balls into the game area 1100. A game ball that has entered 2530 is distributed to either the left or right direction by the distribution valve 2551, and the distribution detection sensor 2580 provided in the distributed direction is in a state where the condition device is operating. When a game ball is detected, the number of rounds of “big hit” game is determined as a predetermined privilege. Then, the game balls distributed in the distribution space 2530 are released to the upstream side of the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B and are accepted to the winning winning openings 2103A and 2103B which can be received with a high probability. Accordingly, when it becomes possible to accept game balls to the special winning openings 2103A and 2103B according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2103, etc., Now, when it is driven into the game area 1100, it can be received through the distribution space 2530 with a high probability to the big prize opening 2103A, 2103B, so that the game ball can be easily accepted into the big prize opening 2103A, 2103B. The number of rounds can be given according to the direction of distribution by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530, and even a beginner can entertain sufficiently. The game ball can be driven while watching the movement and state of the valve 2551, so that the operation of driving the game ball can be enjoyed, Interest in the player skills who can be suppressed.

  In addition, the game balls distributed in a predetermined direction by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530 are both discharged into the game area 1100 upstream of the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B. According to the direction in which the game ball is distributed, the distance that the game ball circulates until it is released from the distribution valve 2551 into the game area 1100 can be changed. By changing the distribution distance of the game balls, it is possible to catch up the game balls that have been hit later with the game balls that have been put in first, and usually a plurality of game balls are placed upstream of the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B. Can be continuously released into the game area 1100 at intervals shorter than the distribution interval of the game balls. Accordingly, it is possible to release more game balls than usual from the upstream side and accept them for the time when the winning prize openings 2103A and 2103B are acceptable, and the player is more entertained and less interesting. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the game balls are distributed by the distribution valve 2551 at a constant interval regardless of the game state, when the game balls are distributed in a desired direction, the distribution of the game balls is adjusted according to the movement of the distribution valve 2551. This makes it easy to measure the timing of the game ball, so that the game ball can be timed so that the game ball can be distributed in a desired direction, and the game ball can be operated to entertain the game. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the game balls are distributed at a constant cycle regardless of the game state, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being felt to be intentionally distributed by the distribution valve 2551. It is possible to entertain the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means without causing distrust to the player, and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, the game ball cannot enter the distribution space 2530 while the distribution direction is changed, and the game ball that has attempted to enter the distribution space 2530 during the change of the distribution direction can be moved. Since it can be stopped at the entrance of the distribution space 2530 (the upper side of the distribution valve 2551), as a game ball driving operation, the game ball is driven so as to reach the distribution valve 2551 during the change of the distribution direction. Thus, a plurality of game balls can be stopped before the distribution valve 2551. Therefore, when changing the distribution direction so that the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game balls in a desired direction, by driving a plurality of game balls and stopping the game balls in front of the distribution valve 2551, When the change of the distribution direction is completed, the stopped game balls can be reliably distributed in a desired direction, and more privileges can be obtained by distributing a plurality of game balls in the desired direction almost simultaneously. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating by simultaneously giving the privilege and the game ball driving operation.

  In addition, as described above, since the game ball can be stopped on the front side of the distribution valve 2551 while the distribution direction is changed, by inserting more game balls while the game ball is stopped, The interval (time interval, distance interval) through which the game ball that is stopped and the game ball that has been subsequently circulated can be made as small as possible. In other words, the distribution intervals of the plurality of game balls can be shortened by the time stopped by the distribution valve 2551 so as to be close to each other, so that the change of the distribution direction is completed and the distribution space 2530 is entered. When the game balls can enter, at least two game balls can be continuously released to the side of the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B at intervals shorter than usual, and the big winning openings 2103A and 2103B can be accepted. It is possible to accept more game balls than usual for a given time, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, as described above, in order to allow more game balls to be received in the big prize opening 2103A, 2103B, the timing at which the game balls are stopped by the distribution valve 2551, and the big prize opening through the distribution space 2530. 2103A and 2103B, it is necessary to hit the game ball at a timing that takes into account the timing at which the game ball is received. It is possible to make it difficult to get bored and to improve motivation for the driving operation, and it is possible to entertain the game and prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the game balls distributed by the distribution valve 2551 are detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580 and the corresponding round number is given, the game balls distributed in the direction in which the corresponding round number is given. Can be reliably detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized. In addition, a distribution detection sensor 2580 for detecting the game balls distributed in the distribution space 2530 is provided, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the distribution detection sensor 2580. Since it is possible to see where the distributed game balls are detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580, it is possible to prevent mistrust from being given to the privilege (number of rounds) to be given. While the game can be continued, the expectation with respect to the number of rounds to be given can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, since the predetermined privilege granted by the privilege granting means is the number of rounds of “big hit” game, when a larger number of rounds is awarded, more game balls are accepted into the grand prize winning openings 2103A and 2103B. The game state can be made, and the player can be thrilled by whether or not the game ball is distributed in the direction in which the desired number of rounds is given in the distribution valve 2551, and the expectation for the distribution is increased. It can suppress that a player's interest falls. In addition, the game ball can be placed in the game ball so that the game ball is distributed in the direction in which the desired number of rounds is given by the distribution valve 2551. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating by delighting the game.

[Recovery measures in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power failure]
By the way, when the pachinko gaming machine is configured as described above, after the player finishes viewing the game description before starting the jackpot game, he or she types a game ball into the game area for selection of the harassment type or pounding type. Before entering the distribution unit 2550, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and the power supply voltage supplied to the power supply board from the external power supply becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage. In the embodiment, when 24V is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), an instruction screen for allowing the game ball to enter the distribution unit 2550 on the display screen of the effect display means (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) (FIG. 76 “Please aim at the one you like ♪”) or the instruction screen has already been displayed, so the instruction screen will not be displayed. Game state at the time of recovery we can not grasp.

  Note that the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a process of returning to the power outage state (power recovery process) in accordance with the backup data stored in the main control built-in RAM, and the jackpot game preparation process (FIG. 68). However, unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L (first distribution detection sensor) or the distribution detection sensor 2580R (second distribution detection sensor), the game does not proceed to the big hit game (execution of the big hit game) Since the mode is not yet determined), the progress of the jackpot game is stopped, and the next process is not advanced in the jackpot game mode determination process. For this reason, no command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. For this reason, the player cannot grasp the game state at the time of restoration and cannot start the jackpot game.

  FIG. 84 is a time chart showing a process from occurrence of jackpot to start of jackpot game. In the illustrated example, after a special symbol is stopped and a jackpot is generated, when a predetermined stop symbol display time (in the embodiment, for example, 1.008 seconds) elapses, the game proceeds to a jackpot game preparation process. On the main control board 4100, the main control program transmits an explanation interval effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140. In FIG. 84, a period A indicates an explanatory interval effect period from the time when an explanatory interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Note that in the period A, even if the player fires a game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R by his / her own intention, the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection are detected. The detection of the game ball by the sensor 2580R is invalidated, and the progress to the big hit game remains stopped.

  When the explanation interval effect period elapses, the condition device starts to operate (step S6627 in FIG. 68), and the gate 2575 of the distribution unit 2550 is activated. That is, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is effective. In FIG. 84, a period B indicates an effective period of the distribution detection sensor 2580.

  The effective period of the distribution detection sensor 2580 continues until a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. In the period B, even if the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the big hit game proceeds unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. do not do. In other words, the jackpot game can be started by the player's intention.

  When a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. In addition, when the number of rounds (the jackpot game mode) is determined, the accessory continuous operation device starts operating (step S6080 in FIG. 69). Further, the jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S6085). In FIG. 84, a period C indicates a jackpot start interval effect period from the time when the jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. Then, when the jackpot start interval effect period elapses, the jackpots 2103A and 2103B are opened, and the jackpot game is started (FIG. 71).

  By the way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during the game, a power failure warning signal is transmitted from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 as described above, and when the main control program detects the power failure warning signal, the power failure notice processing is performed. Execute, calculate and store the RAM checksum, and set the backup flag. The game data stored in the RAM when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs is held by a backup power source (backup data).

  Then, in the event of a power failure, the main control program executes the power-on process shown in FIG. 38 when a power failure occurs, and in the event of a momentary power loss, the reset start is triggered by the reset signal input of the watchdog timer. Execute power recovery processing to return to the previous state.

  In FIG. 84, when a power failure or instantaneous interruption occurs during period A, that is, the explanation interval effect period (indicated by x in the figure), the game state at that time is the processing flag set to 3 by the jackpot game preparation process of FIG. It is defined by the identification flag having a value of 1. In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during period B, that is, the distribution detection sensor effective period (indicated by x in the figure), the gaming state at that time is that the processing flag is 3 and the status identification flag is 2 It is prescribed. However, since the interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in both the period A and the period B, the command is not transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 at the time of recovery.

  The embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances. When it is determined in the power recovery process that a power failure or an instantaneous power failure has occurred in the period A or the period B, the main control is performed. The program transmits, to the peripheral control unit 4140, a driving instruction effect command for displaying a driving instruction screen (see FIG. 76) for injecting the game ball into the sorting unit 2550.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the gaming state determination process. This gaming state determination process is a process executed according to the backup data as one process in the above-described main control side power-on process (hereinafter also referred to as “power recovery process”). In this game state determination process, the main control program first determines whether or not the processing flag is 3 (whether or not to execute the jackpot game preparation process) (step S6030). The game state determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the power recovery process.

  On the other hand, when the processing flag is 3 (when the processing is to be executed from the jackpot game preparation process), the main control program next has a status identification flag of 2 which is a flag for identifying the gaming state in the jackpot game preparation process. It is determined whether or not (step S6031). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred during the effective period of the distribution detection sensor. When the status identification flag is 2, the main control program writes and sets the driving instruction effect command in the transmission information storage area (step S6037), ends the gaming state determination process, returns to the power recovery process, and executes it. To do.

  On the other hand, when the status identification flag is not 2, the main control program determines whether or not the status identification flag is 1 (step S6032). That is, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred during the explanation interval effect period. If the status identification flag is not 1 in step S6032, the main control program ends the gaming state determination process and returns to the power recovery process to be executed.

  On the other hand, when the status identification flag is 1 in step S6032, the main control program starts the operation of the condition device (step S6033).

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the time reduction function is activated (step S6034), and when the time reduction function is activated, the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S6035). If not, the status identification flag is updated to 2 (step S6036). Next, the main control program sets a driving instruction effect command (step S6037), ends the gaming state determination process, and returns to the power recovery process for execution.

  As described above, when the main control program determines that a power failure or instantaneous power failure has occurred during the effective period of the distribution detection sensor, or when it is determined that a power failure or instantaneous power failure has occurred during the explanation interval production period, The instructing instruction effect command is written and set in the transmission information storage area.

  The main control program transmits the driving instruction effect command set in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process described above. The effect control program that has received this driving instruction effect command causes the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to execute an effect display on the driving instruction screen indicating that the game ball should be driven into the sorting unit 2550.

  The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side displays characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” and audio output. At this time, in order to have an impact, characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” are displayed in a form that covers almost the entire area of the display screen of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the normal voice Audio output is performed in a mode different from an output mode (for example, a mode in which voice is output by a single character) (for example, a mode in which audio is output simultaneously by a plurality of characters).

  In this way, when the power is restored, the game instruction ball is shot on the sorting unit 2550 on the effect display means. It can be clearly recognized. The player who touches the driving instruction screen hits the game ball to the right with the aim of the distribution unit 2550 arranged on the right side of the game area. When the game ball launched into the game area enters the distribution unit and the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the main control program determines the execution mode in the jackpot game, Thereafter, since the jackpot game is started, the player can enjoy the jackpot game with peace of mind even after the restoration.

  The main control program executes the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described above based on the fact that the processing flag is 3 and the situation identification flag is 2, so that the distribution detection sensor effective period Return to.

  When the jackpot game can be started, on the main control board 4100, the main control program transmits a jackpot related command (S6084, S6085) to the peripheral control unit 4140 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a. Thereby, a lamp | ramp, a sound, a drive motor, etc. return to a normal state.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1900 Liquid crystal display device 4100 Main control board 4140 Peripheral control board

Claims (1)

Variable display means for variably displaying at least one kind of special symbol;
When the starting condition is satisfied, it is then determined whether a predetermined winning condition is satisfied, and when the winning condition is satisfied, a game control means for shifting from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state,
Effect control means for controlling the effect operation by the control of the game control means,
Display means having a display area in which display contents according to the control of the effect control means are represented;
With
The game control means includes
Triggered by the transition of the gaming state, a transition destination command indicating that the gaming state has been transitioned is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means includes
A gaming machine, wherein the presentation operation is controlled in a manner in consideration of the transferred gaming state based on the transfer destination command received from the game control means.